Rosemount 8700M 8732EM magnetic flowmeter, 8705, 8711, 8721 flow sensor Reference Manual

Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Rosemount® 8700M
Magnetic Flowmeter Platform
with Modbus® RS 485 Protocol
Reference Manual
Table of Contents
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Contents
1Section 1: Introduction
1.1 System description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2Section 2: Installation
2.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.3 Transmitter symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.4 Pre-installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.5 Installation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.5.1Transmitter installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.5.2Identify options and configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.5.3Mechanical considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.5.4Electrical considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.5.5Environmental considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.6 Handling and lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.7 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
2.7.1Upstream/downstream piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
2.7.2Flow direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
2.8 Sensor location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
2.8.1Electrode orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
2.9 Sensor installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
2.9.1Flanged sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
2.9.2Flange bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
2.10 Wafer sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
2.10.1Gaskets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
2.10.2Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
2.10.3Flange bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
2.11 Process reference connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
2.12 Wiring the transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
2.12.1Conduit entries and connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
2.12.2Conduit requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
2.12.3Connecting sensor to transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
2.12.48732EM terminal block connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Table of Contents
v
Reference Manual
Table of Contents
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
2.12.5Modbus output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
2.12.6Powering the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
2.13 Cover jam screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
2.14 Modbus configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
2.14.1Local operator interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
2.15 Basic configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
2.15.1Basic setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
3Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
3.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
3.2 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
3.3 Hardware switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
3.3.1Transmitter security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
3.3.2Internal/external pulse power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
3.3.3Changing hardware switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
3.4 Additional loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
3.4.1Connect pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
3.4.2Connect discrete output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
3.4.3Connect discrete input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
3.5 Process reference connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
3.6 Coil housing configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
3.6.1Standard coil housing configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
3.6.2Process leak protection (option M1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
3.6.3Process leak containment (Option M2 or M4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
3.6.4Process Leak Containment with Electrode Access (Option M3). . . . . . . . . .52
3.6.5Higher temperature applications and sensor insulation best practices . . .53
4Section 4: Operation
4.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
4.2 Local operator interface (LOI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
4.2.1Basic features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
4.2.2Data entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
vi
Table of Contents
Reference Manual
Table of Contents
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
4.2.3Data entry examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
4.2.4Dynamic variable display pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
4.2.5Totalizer functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
4.2.6Display lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
4.2.7Diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
4.2.8Display symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
5Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
5.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
5.2 Configure outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
5.2.1Modbus output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
5.2.2Pulse output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
5.2.3Totalizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
5.2.4Discrete input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
5.2.5Configure LOI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
5.3 Additional parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
5.3.1Coil drive frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
5.3.2Process density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
5.3.3Reverse flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
5.3.4Low flow cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
5.3.5Flow damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
5.3.6Signal processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
5.4 Configure special units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
5.4.1Base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
5.4.2Conversion factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
5.4.3Base time unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
5.4.4Special volume unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
5.4.5Special flow rate unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
6Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
6.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
6.2 Modbus Communication Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
6.3 Licensing and enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
6.3.1Licensing the 8732EM diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
6.4 Tunable empty pipe detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Table of Contents
vii
Reference Manual
Table of Contents
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
6.4.1Tunable empty pipe parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
6.4.2Optimizing tunable empty pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
6.5 Electronics temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
6.5.1Turning electronics temperature on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
6.5.2Electronics temperature parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
6.6 Ground/wiring fault detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
6.6.1Turning ground/wiring fault on/off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
6.6.2Ground/wiring fault parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
6.7 High process noise detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
6.7.1Turning high process noise on/off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
6.7.2High process noise parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
6.8 Coated electrode detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
6.8.1Turning coated electrode detection on/off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
6.8.2Coated electrode parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
6.9 SMART™ Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
6.9.1Sensor baseline (signature) parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
6.9.2Establishing the sensor baseline (signature) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
6.9.3SMART Meter Verification test criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
6.10 Run manual SMART Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
6.10.1Test condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
6.10.2Test scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
6.11 Continuous SMART Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
6.11.1Test scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
6.12 SMART Meter Verification test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
6.13 SMART Meter Verification measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
6.14 Optimizing the SMART Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
6.14.1Optimizing continuous SMART Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
6.14.1Manual Calibration Verification Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
7Section 7: Digital Signal Processing
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
7.2 Safety messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
7.3 Process noise profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
7.4 High process noise diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
7.5 Optimizing flow reading in noisy applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
7.5.1Coil drive frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
7.5.2Auto zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
7.5.3Digital signal processing (DSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
viii
Table of Contents
Reference Manual
Table of Contents
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
7.6 Explanation of signal processing algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
8Section 8: Maintenance
8.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
8.2 Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
8.3 Installing a Local Operator Interface (LOI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
8.4 Replacing 8732EM revision 4 electronics stack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
8.5 Replacing socket module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
8.5.1Integral mount socket module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
8.5.2Replacing terminal block socket module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
8.6 Trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
8.6.1Digital trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
8.6.2Universal trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
9Section 9: Troubleshooting
9.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
9.2 Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
9.3 Installation check and guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
9.3.1Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
9.3.2Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
9.3.3Remote wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
9.3.4Process fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
9.4 Diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
9.4.1Troubleshooting empty pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
9.4.2Troubleshooting ground/wiring fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
9.4.3Troubleshooting high process noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
9.4.4Troubleshooting coated electrode detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
9.4.5Troubleshooting SMART™ Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
9.5 Basic troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
9.6 Sensor troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
9.6.1Sensor adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
9.6.2Socket module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
9.6.3Installed sensor tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
9.6.4Uninstalled sensor tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
9.7 Technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
9.8 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
AAppendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Table of Contents
ix
Reference Manual
Table of Contents
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
A.1 Rosemount 8732EM Transmitter specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
A.1.1Functional specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
A.1.2Advanced diagnostics capabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
A.1.3Output signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
A.1.4Sensor compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
A.1.5Performance specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
A.1.6Analog output effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
A.1.7Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
A.2 Rosemount 8705-M Flanged Sensor specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
A.2.1Functional specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
A.2.2Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
A.3 Rosemount 8711-M/L Wafer Sensor specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
A.3.1Functional specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
A.3.2Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
A.4 Rosemount 8721 Hygienic (Sanitary) Sensor specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
A.4.1Functional specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
A.4.2Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
BAppendix B: Approval Information
B.1 Product certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
B.2 FM hazardous locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
B.3 ATEX/IECEx hazardous locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
B.4 Canadian Standards Association (CSA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
B.5 Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
CAppendix C: Modbus Coil and Register Map
DAppendix D: Wiring Diagrams
D.1 8732EM wiring diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
D.2 775 Smart Wireless THUM™ Adapter
wiring diagrams235
D.3 475 Field Communicator wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
EAppendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
E.1 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
E.1.1Universal capability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
E.1.2Three step process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
E.2 Rosemount sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
x
Table of Contents
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Table of Contents
August 2015
E.2.18705/8707/8711/8721 Sensors to 8732 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
E.2.28705 M and 8711 M/L Sensors to 8732EM Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
E.2.38701 sensor to 8732 transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
E.2.4Connecting sensors of other manufacturers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
E.3 Brooks sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
E.3.1Model 5000 sensor to 8732 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
E.3.2Model 7400 sensor to 8732 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
E.4 Endress and Hauser sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
E.4.1Endress and Hauser sensor to 8732 Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
E.5 Fischer and Porter sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
E.5.1Model 10D1418 sensor to 8732 Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
E.5.2Model 10D1419 sensor to 8732 Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
E.5.3Model 10D1430 sensor to 8732 Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
E.5.4Model 10D1430 sensor to 8732 Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
E.5.5Model 10D1465/10D1475 sensors to 8732 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
E.5.6Fischer and Porter sensor to 8732 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
E.6 Foxboro sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
E.6.1Series 1800 sensor to 8732 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
E.6.2Series 1800 sensor to 8732 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
E.6.3Series 2800 Sensor to 8732 Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
E.6.4Foxboro Sensor to 8732 Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
E.7 Kent Veriflux VTC sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
E.7.1Veriflux VTC sensor to 8732 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
E.8 Kent sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
E.8.1Kent sensor to 8732 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
E.9 Krohne sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
E.9.1Krohne sensor to 8732 Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
E.10 Taylor sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
E.10.1Series 1100 sensor to 8732 Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
E.10.2Taylor sensor to 8732 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
E.11 Yamatake Honeywell sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
E.11.1Yamatake Honeywell sensor to 8732 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
E.12 Yokogawa sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
E.12.1Yokogawa sensor to 8732 Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
E.13 Generic manufacturer sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
E.13.1Generic manufacturer sensor to 8732 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
E.13.2Identify the terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
E.13.3Wiring connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Table of Contents
xi
Table of Contents
August 2015
xii
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Table of Contents
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Rosemount 8700M
Magnetic Flowmeter Platform
Read this manual before working with the product. For personal and system safety, and for
optimum product performance, make sure you thoroughly understand the contents
before installing, using, or maintaining this product.
Failure to follow these installation guidelines could result in death or serious injury.









Installation and servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. Do not
perform any servicing other than that contained in the operating instructions, unless
qualified.
Verify the installation is done safely and is consistent with the operating environment.
If installed in explosive atmospheres (hazardous areas, classified areas, or an “Ex”
environment), it must be assured that the device certification and installation
techniques are suitable for that particular environment.
Explosion hazard. Do not disconnect equipment when a flammable or combustible
atmosphere is present.
To prevent ignition of flammable or combustible atmospheres, disconnect power
before servicing circuits.
Do not connect a Rosemount 8732EM Transmitter to a non-Rosemount sensor that is
located in an explosive atmosphere.
Substitution of components may impair Intrinsic Safety.
Follow national, local, and plant standards to properly earth ground the transmitter
and sensor. The earth ground must be separate from the process reference ground.
Rosemount Magnetic Flowmeters ordered with non-standard paint options or
non-metallic labels may be subject to electrostatic discharge. To avoid electrostatic
charge build-up, do not rub the flowmeter with a dry cloth or clean with solvents.
Shock Hazard
Potential shock hazard across remote junction box terminals 1 & 2 (40V).
Explosion Hazard
Electrodes exposed to process. Use only compatible transmitter and approved installation
practices.
For process temperatures greater than 284 °F (140 °C), use a wire rated for 257 °F (125 °C).
xiii
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
The electronics may store energy after power is removed. Allow 10 minutes
for charge to dissipate prior to removing electronics compartment cover.
Explosions could result in death or serious injury.




Verify that the operating atmosphere of the sensor and transmitter is consistent with
the appropriate hazardous locations certifications.
Do not remove the transmitter cover in explosive atmospheres when the circuit is live.
Do not connect a Modbus communication tool in an explosive atmosphere. Check
plant safety standards before making any connections.
Both transmitter covers must be fully engaged to meet explosion-proof requirements.
Failure to follow safe installation and servicing guidelines could result in death or
serious injury.




Make sure only qualified personnel perform the installation.
Do not perform any service other than those contained in this manual unless qualified.
Process leaks could result in death or serious injury.
The electrode compartment may contain line pressure; it must be depressurized
before the cover is removed.
High voltage that may be present on leads could cause electrical shock.

Avoid contact with leads and terminals.
Failure to follow these guidelines could result in death or serious injury.
Installation and servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. Do not
perform any servicing other than that contained in the operating instructions, unless
qualified. Verify that the operating environment of the sensor and transmitter is
consistent with the appropriate hazardous area approval.
Do not connect a Rosemount 8732EM to a non-Rosemount sensor that is located in an
explosive atmosphere.
Mishandling products exposed to a hazardous substance may result in death or serious
injury. If the product being returned was exposed to a hazardous substance as defined by
OSHA, a copy of the required Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each hazardous
substance identified must be included with the returned goods.
xiv
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
The Rosemount 8732EM Transmitter has not been evaluated for use with other
manufacturers' magnetic flowmeter sensors in hazardous (Ex or Classified) areas. Special
care should be taken by the end-user and installer that the 8732EM Transmitter meets the
safety and performance requirements of the other manufacturer’s equipment.
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the
transmitter coil excitation circuit.
The products described in this document are NOT designed for nuclear-qualified
applications. Using non-nuclear qualified products in applications that require
nuclear-qualified hardware or products may cause inaccurate readings.
For information on Rosemount nuclear-qualified products, contact your local Emerson
Process Management Sales Representative.
xv
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
xvi
Reference Manual
Section 1: Introduction
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Section 1
1.1
August 2015
Introduction
System description
The 8700M Magnetic Flowmeter Platform consists of a sensor and a transmitter. The sensor is
installed in-line with the process piping; the transmitter can be remotely mounted or integrally
mounted to the sensor.
Figure 1-1. Field Mount Transmitter
Integral
Remote
There are three Rosemount® flow sensors available:1
Figure 1-2. Flow Sensors
8705
8711
8721
1.Also available for use with 8707 High Signal sensor with dual calibration (option code D2).
Introduction
1
Section 1: Introduction
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Figure 1-3. 8705 Cross Section
The flow sensor contains two magnetic coils located on opposite sides of the sensor. Two
electrodes, located perpendicular to the coils and opposite each other, make contact with the
liquid. The transmitter energizes the coils and creates a magnetic field. A conductive liquid
moving through the magnetic field generates an induced voltage at the electrodes. This voltage
is proportional to the flow velocity. The transmitter converts the voltage detected by the
electrodes into a flow reading.
2
Introduction
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Section 2
Installation
Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3
Transmitter symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
Pre-installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5
Installation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5
Handling and lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 10
Sensor location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 11
Sensor installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 12
Wafer sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 17
Process reference connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 19
Wiring the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 23
Cover jam screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 33
Modbus configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 33
Basic configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 35
2.1
Introduction
This section covers the steps required to physically install the magnetic flowmeter. Instructions
and procedures in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the
personnel performing the operations. Refer to the following safety messages before performing
any operation in this section.
2.2
Safety messages
NOTICE
This document provides basic installation guidelines for the Rosemount 8700M Magnetic
Flowmeter Platform with Modbus RS-485 Protocol. For comprehensive instructions for
detailed configuration, diagnostics, maintenance, service, installation, or troubleshooting,
refer to the appropriate sections in this manual. The quick start guide—as well as this
reference manual—are available online at www.rosemount.com.
Installation
3
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Failure to follow these installation guidelines could result in death or serious injury.









Installation and servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. Do not
perform any servicing other than that contained in the operating instructions, unless
qualified.
Verify the installation is done safely and is consistent with the operating environment.
If installed in explosive atmospheres (hazardous areas, classified areas, or an “Ex”
environment), it must be assured that the device certification and installation
techniques are suitable for that particular environment.
Explosion hazard—Do not disconnect equipment when a flammable or combustible
atmosphere is present.
To prevent ignition of flammable or combustible atmospheres, disconnect power
before servicing circuits.
Do not connect a Rosemount 8732EM Transmitter to a non-Rosemount sensor that is
located in an explosive atmosphere.
Substitution of components may impair Intrinsic Safety.
Follow national, local, and plant standards to properly earth ground the transmitter
and sensor. The earth ground must be separate from the process reference ground.
Rosemount Magnetic Flowmeters ordered with non-standard paint options or
non-metallic labels may be subject to electrostatic discharge. To avoid electrostatic
charge build-up, do not rub the flowmeter with a dry cloth or clean with solvents.
NOTICE





2.3
The sensor liner is vulnerable to handling damage. Never place anything through the
sensor for the purpose of lifting or gaining leverage. Liner damage may render the sensor
inoperable.
Metallic or spiral-wound gaskets should not be used as they will damage the liner face of
the sensor. If spiral wound or metallic gaskets are required for the application, lining
protectors must be used. If frequent removal is anticipated, take precautions to protect
the liner ends. Short spool pieces attached to the sensor ends are often used for
protection.
Correct flange bolt tightening is crucial for proper sensor operation and life. All bolts must
be tightened in the proper sequence to the specified torque specifications. Failure to
observe these instructions could result in severe damage to the sensor lining and possible
sensor replacement.
In cases where high voltage/high current are present near the meter installation, ensure
proper protection methods are followed to prevent stray voltage/current from passing
through the meter. Failure to adequately protect the meter could result in damage to the
transmitter and lead to meter failure.
Completely remove all electrical connections from both sensor and transmitter prior to
welding on the pipe. For maximum protection of the sensor, consider removing it from
the pipeline.
Transmitter symbols
Caution symbol — check product documentation for details
Protective conductor (grounding) terminal
4
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
2.4
August 2015
Pre-installation
Before installing the Rosemount 8732EM Magnetic Flowmeter Transmitter, there are several
pre-installation steps that should be completed to make the installation process easier:

Identify the options and configurations that apply to your application.

Set the hardware switches if necessary.

Consider mechanical, electrical, and environmental requirements.
2.5
Installation procedures
2.5.1
Transmitter installation
Installation of the Rosemount Magnetic Flowmeter includes both detailed mechanical and
electrical installation procedures.
2.5.2
Identify options and configurations
The typical installation of the 8732EM includes a device power connection, a Modbus RS-485
output connection, and sensor coil and electrode connections. Other applications may require
one or more of the following configurations or options:

Pulse Output

Discrete Input/Discrete Output
Hardware switches
The 8732EM electronics stack is equipped with user-selectable hardware switches. These
switches set the Internal/External Pulse Power and Transmitter Security. The factory default
settings for these switches is as follows:
Table 2-1. Hardware Switch Default Settings
Hardware switch
Default setting
Internal/External Pulse Power
External
Transmitter Security
Off
In most cases, it will not be necessary to change the setting of the hardware switches. If the
switch settings need to be changed, follow the steps outlined under Changing hardware switch
settings in Section 3: Advanced Installation Details.
Note
To prevent switch damage, use a non-metallic tool to move switch positions.
Be sure to identify any additional options and configurations that apply to the installation. Keep
a list of these options for consideration during the installation and configuration procedures.
Installation
5
Section 2: Installation
2.5.3
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Mechanical considerations
The mounting site for the Rosemount 8732EM Transmitter should provide enough room for
secure mounting, easy access to conduit entries, full opening of the transmitter covers, and easy
readability of the LOI screen, if equipped.
For remote mount transmitter (8732EMRxxx) installations, a mounting bracket is provided for
use on a 2-inch pipe or a flat surface (see Figure 2-1).
Note
If the Rosemount 8732EM is mounted separately from the sensor, it may not be subject to
limitations that might apply to the sensor.
Rotate integral mount transmitter housing
The transmitter housing can be rotated on the sensor in 90-degree increments by removing the
four mounting screws on the bottom of the housing. Do not rotate the housing more than 180
degrees in any one direction. Prior to tightening, be sure the mating surfaces are clean, the
O-ring is seated in the groove, and there is no gap between the housing and the sensor.
6
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Figure 2-1. Rosemount 8732EM Dimensional Drawing
>@
Note
Conduit entries are 1/2 -in. NPT or M20 connections. If an alternate thread connection is
required, thread adapters must be used.
2.5.4
Electrical considerations
Before making any electrical connections to the Rosemount 8732EM, consider national, local,
and plant electrical installation requirements. Be sure to have the proper power supply, conduit,
and other accessories necessary to comply with these standards.
Both remotely and integrally mounted Rosemount 8732EM Transmitters require external
power, so there must be access to a suitable power source.
Installation
7
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table 2-2. Electrical Data
Rosemount 8732EM Flow Transmitter
Power input
90–250VAC, 0.45A, 40VA
12–42VDC, 1.2A, 15W
Pulsed circuit
Internally powered (Active): Outputs up to 12VDC, 12.1mA, 73mW
Externally powered (Passive): Input up to 28VDC, 100mA, 1W
Modbus output
circuit
Internally powered (Active): Outputs up to 3.3VDC, 100mA, 100mW
Termination
resistors
Typically 120 ohms. Refer to the MODBUS over Serial Line Specification &
Implementation Guide (http://www.modbus.org) for more details.
Um
250V
Coil excitation
output
500mA, 40V max, 9W max
Rosemount 8705-M and 8711-M/L Sensor1
Coil excitation
input
500mA, 40V max, 20W max
Electrode circuit
5V, 200uA, 1mW
1. Provided by the transmitter.
2.5.5
Environmental considerations
To ensure maximum transmitter life, avoid extreme temperatures and excessive vibration.
Typical problem areas include the following:

High-vibration lines with integrally mounted transmitters.

Tropical/desert installations in direct sunlight.

Outdoor installations in arctic climates.
Remote-mounted transmitters may be installed in the control room to protect the electronics
from the harsh environment and to provide easy access for configuration or service.
8
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
2.6
August 2015
Handling and lifting

Handle all parts carefully to prevent damage. Whenever possible, transport the system to the
installation site in the original shipping container.

PTFE-lined sensors are shipped with end covers that protect it from both mechanical damage
and normal unrestrained distortion. Remove the end covers just before installation.

Keep the shipping plugs in the conduit connections until you are ready to connect and seal
them.

The sensor should be supported by the pipeline. Pipe supports are recommended on both
the inlet and outlet sides of the sensor pipeline. There should be no additional support
attached to the sensor.

Additional safety recommendations for mechanical handling:
- Use proper PPE (Personal Protection Equipment) including safety glasses and steel
toed shoes).
- Do not drop the device from any height.

Do not lift the meter by holding the electronics housing or junction box.The sensor liner is
vulnerable to handling damage. Never place anything through the sensor for the purpose of
lifting or gaining leverage. Liner damage can render the sensor useless.

If provided, use the lifting lugs on each flange to handle the Magnetic Flowmeter when it is
transported and lowered into place at the installation site. If lifting lugs are not provided, the
Magnetic Flowmeter must be supported with a lifting sling on each side of the housing.
- Standard Pressure 3-in. through 36-in. Flanged Magnetic Flowmeters come with
lifting lugs.
- High Pressure (above 600#) 1-in. through 24-in. Flanged Magnetic Flowmeters come
with lifting lugs.
- Wafers and Sanitary Magnetic Flowmeters do not come with lifting lugs.
Figure 2-2. Rosemount 8705 Sensor Support for Handling and Lifting
A
B
A. Without lifting lugs
B. With lifting lugs
Installation
9
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
2.7
Mounting
2.7.1
Upstream/downstream piping
To ensure specified accuracy over widely varying process conditions, install the sensor with a
minimum of five straight pipe diameters upstream and two pipe diameters downstream from the
electrode plane (see Figure 2-3).
Figure 2-3. Upstream and Downstream Straight Pipe Diameters
5 Pipe Diameters
2 Pipe Diameters
Fl ow
Installations with reduced upstream and downstream straight runs are possible. In reduced straight
run installations, the meter may not meet absolute accuracy specifications. Reported flow rates will
still be highly repeatable.
2.7.2
Flow direction
The sensor should be mounted so the arrow points in the direction of flow. See Figure 2-4.
Figure 2-4. Flow Direction Arrow
10
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
2.8
August 2015
Sensor location
The sensor should be installed in a location that ensures it remains full during operation. Vertical
installation with upward process fluid flow keeps the cross-sectional area full, regardless of flow
rate. Horizontal installation should be restricted to low piping sections that are normally full.
Figure 2-5. Sensor Orientation
FLOW
FLOW
2.8.1
Electrode orientation
The electrodes in the sensor are properly oriented when the two measurement electrodes are in
the 3 and 9 o’clock positions or within 45 degrees from the horizontal, as shown on the left of
Figure 2-6. Avoid any mounting orientation that positions the top of the sensor at 90 degrees
from the vertical position as shown in Figure 2-6.
Figure 2-6. Mounting Position
CORRECT
INCORRECT
For hazardous location installations, refer to Appendix B Approval Information for sensor
orientation pertaining to specific T-code compliance.
Installation
11
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
2.9
Sensor installation
2.9.1
Flanged sensors
Gaskets
The sensor requires a gasket at each process connection. The gasket material must be compatible with
the process fluid and operating conditions. Gaskets are required on each side of a grounding ring
(see Figure 2-7). All other applications (including sensors with lining protectors or a grounding
electrode) require only one gasket on each process connection.
Note
Metallic or spiral-wound gaskets should not be used as they will damage the liner face of the
sensor. If spiral wound or metallic gaskets are required for the application, lining protectors
must be used.
Figure 2-7. Flanged Gasket Placement
B
A
FLOW
A. Grounding ring and gasket (optional)
B. Customer-supplied gasket
12
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
2.9.2
August 2015
Flange bolts
Note
Do not bolt one side at a time. Tighten both sides simultaneously. Example:
1. Snug upstream
2. Snug downstream
3. Tighten upstream
4. Tighten downstream
Do not snug and tighten the upstream side and then snug and tighten the downstream side.
Failure to alternate between the upstream and downstream flanges when tightening bolts may
result in liner damage.
Suggested torque values by sensor line size and liner type are listed in Table 2-4 for ASME B16.5
flanges and Table for EN flanges. Consult the factory if the flange rating of the sensor is not
listed. Tighten flange bolts on the upstream side of the sensor in the incremental sequence
shown in Figure 2-8 to 20% of the suggested torque values. Repeat the process on the
downstream side of the sensor. For sensors with greater or fewer flange bolts, tighten the bolts
in a similar crosswise sequence. Repeat this entire tightening sequence at 40%, 60%, 80%, and
100% of the suggested torque values.
If leakage occurs at the suggested torque values, the bolts can be tightened in additional 10%
increments until the joint stops leaking, or until the measured torque value reaches the
maximum torque value of the bolts. Practical consideration for the integrity of the liner often
leads to distinct torque values to stop leakage due to the unique combinations of flanges, bolts,
gaskets, and sensor liner material.
Check for leaks at the flanges after tightening the bolts. Failure to use the correct tightening
methods can result in severe damage. While under pressure, sensor materials may deform over
time and require a second tightening 24 hours after the initial installation.
Figure 2-8. Flange Bolt Torquing Sequence
Installation
13
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Prior to installation, identify the lining material of the flow sensor to ensure the suggested
torque values are applied.
Table 2-3. Lining Material
Fluoropolymer liners
Other liners
T - PTFE
P - Polyurethane
F - ETFE
N - Neoprene
A - PFA
L - Linatex (Natural Rubber)
K - PFA+
D - Adiprene
Table 2-4. Suggested Flange Bolt Torque Values for Rosemount 8705 (ASME)
Fluoropolymer liners
Size
code
Line size
Class 150
(pound-feet)
Class 300
(pound-feet)
005
0.5-in. (15 mm)
8
8
N/A
N/A
010
1-in. (25 mm)
8
12
N/A
N/A
015
1.5-in. (40 mm)
13
25
7
18
020
2-in. (50 mm)
19
17
14
11
025
2.5-in. (65 mm)
22
24
17
16
030
3-in. (80 mm)
34
35
23
23
040
4-in. (100 mm)
26
50
17
32
050
5-in. (125 mm)
36
60
25
35
060
6-in. (150 mm)
45
50
30
37
080
8-in. (200 mm)
60
82
42
55
100
10-in. (250 mm)
55
80
40
70
120
12-in. (300 mm)
65
125
55
105
140
14-in. (350 mm)
85
110
70
95
160
16-in. (400 mm)
85
160
65
140
180
18-in. (450 mm)
120
170
95
150
200
20-in. (500 mm)
110
175
90
150
240
24-in. (600 mm)
165
280
140
250
1
30-in. (750 mm)
195
415
165
375
36-in. (900 mm)
280
575
245
525
300
360(1)
Class 150
Class 300
(pound-feet) (pound-feet)
Other liners
1. Torque values are valid for ASME and AWWA flanges.
14
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table 2-5. Flange Bolt Torque and Load Specifications for 8705 (EN 1092-1)
Installation
Fluoropolymer liners (in Newton-meters)
Size
code
Line size
PN10
PN 16
PN 25
PN 40
005
0.5-in. (15 mm)
N/A
N/A
N/A
10
010
1-in. (25 mm)
N/A
N/A
N/A
20
015
1.5-in. (40 mm)
N/A
N/A
N/A
50
020
2-in. (50 mm)
N/A
N/A
N/A
60
025
2.5-in. (65 mm)
N/A
N/A
N/A
50
030
3-in. (80 mm)
N/A
N/A
N/A
50
040
4-in. (100 mm)
N/A
50
N/A
70
050
5-in. (125 mm)
N/A
70
N/A
100
060
6-in. (150mm)
N/A
90
N/A
130
080
8-in.(200 mm)
130
90
130
170
100
10-in. (250 mm)
100
130
190
250
120
12-in. (300 mm)
120
170
190
270
140
14-in. (350 mm)
160
220
320
410
160
16-in. (400 mm)
220
280
410
610
180
18-in. (450 mm)
190
340
330
420
200
20-in. (500 mm)
230
380
440
520
240
24-in. (600 mm)
290
570
590
850
15
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table 2-5. Flange Bolt Torque and Load Specifications for 8705 (EN 1092-1) (continued)
16
Other liners (in Newton-meters)
Size
code
Line size
PN10
PN 16
PN 25
PN 40
010
1-in. (25 mm)
N/A
N/A
N/A
20
015
1.5-in. (40 mm)
N/A
N/A
N/A
30
020
2-in. (50 mm)
N/A
N/A
N/A
40
025
2.5-in. (65 mm)
N/A
N/A
N/A
35
030
3-in. (80 mm)
N/A
N/A
N/A
30
040
4-in. (100 mm)
N/A
40
N/A
50
050
5-in. (125 mm)
N/A
50
N/A
70
060
6-in. (150 mm)
N/A
60
N/A
90
080
8-in. (200 mm)
90
60
90
110
100
10-in. (250 mm)
70
80
130
170
120
12-in. (300 mm)
80
110
130
180
140
14-in. (350 mm)
110
150
210
280
160
16-in. (400 mm)
150
190
280
410
180
18-in. (450 mm)
130
230
220
280
200
20-in. (500 mm)
150
260
300
350
240
24-in. (600 mm)
200
380
390
560
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
2.10
Wafer sensors
2.10.1
Gaskets
August 2015
The sensor requires a gasket at each process connection. The gasket material selected must be
compatible with the process fluid and operating conditions. Gaskets are required on each side of
a grounding ring. See Figure 2-9 below.
Note
Metallic or spiral-wound gaskets should not be used as they will damage the liner face of the
sensor.
Figure 2-9. Wafer Gasket Placement
Installation
17
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
2.10.2
Alignment
On 1.5-in. through 8-in. (40 through 200 mm) line sizes, Rosemount requires installing the
alignment spacers to ensure proper centering of the wafer sensor between the process flanges.
1. Insert studs for the bottom side of the sensor between the pipe flanges and center the
alignment spacer in the middle of the stud. See Figure 2-9 for the bolt hole locations
recommended for the spacers provided. Stud specifications are listed in Table 2-6.
2. Place the sensor between the flanges. Make sure the alignment spacers are properly centered
on the studs. For vertical flow installations, slide the O-ring over the stud to keep the spacer
in place. See Figure 2-9. Ensure the spacers match the flange size and class rating for the
process flanges. See Table 2-7.
3. Insert the remaining studs, washers, and nuts.
4. Tighten to the torque specifications shown in Table 2-8. Do not over-tighten the bolts or the
liner may be damaged.
Table 2-6. Stud Specifications
Nominal sensor size
Stud specifications
1.5-in. through 8-in. (40 through 200 mm)
CS, ASTM A193, Grade B7, threaded mounting studs
Table 2-7. Rosemount Alignment Spacer Table
Dash no.
18
Line size
(-xxxx)
(in)
(mm)
Flange rating
0A15
0A20
0A30
0B15
AA15
AA20
AA30
AA40
AA60
AA80
AB15
AB20
AB30
AB40
AB60
AB80
DB40
DB60
DB80
DC80
DD15
DD20
1.5
2
3
1.5
1.5
2
3
4
6
8
1.5
2
3
4
6
8
4
6
8
8
1.5
2
40
50
80
40
40
50
80
100
150
200
40
50
80
100
150
200
100
150
200
200
40
50
JIS 10K-20K
JIS 10K-20K
JIS 10K
JIS 40K
ASME- 150#
ASME - 150#
ASME - 150#
ASME - 150#
ASME - 150#
ASME - 150#
ASME - 300#
ASME - 300#
ASME - 300#
ASME - 300#
ASME - 300#
ASME - 300#
EN 1092-1 - PN10/16
EN 1092-1 - PN10/16
EN 1092-1 - PN10/16
EN 1092-1 - PN25
EN 1092-1 - PN10/16/25/40
EN 1092-1 - PN10/16/25/40
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table 2-7. Rosemount Alignment Spacer Table (continued)
Dash no.
Line size
(-xxxx)
(in)
(mm)
Flange rating
DD30
DD40
DD60
DD80
RA80
RC20
RC30
RC40
RC60
RC80
3
4
6
8
8
2
3
4
6
8
80
100
150
200
200
50
80
100
150
200
EN 1092-1 - PN10/16/25/40
EN 1092-1 - PN25/40
EN 1092-1 - PN25/40
EN 1092-1 - PN40
AS40871-PN16
AS40871-PN21/35
AS40871-PN21/35
AS40871-PN21/35
AS40871-PN21/35
AS40871-PN21/35
To order an Alignment Spacer Kit (qty 3 spacers) use p/n 08711-3211-xxxx along with the Dash
no. above.
2.10.3
Flange bolts
Wafer sensors require threaded studs. See Figure 2-8 on page 13 for torque sequence. Always
check for leaks at the flanges after tightening the flange bolts. All sensors require a second
tightening 24 hours after initial flange bolt tightening.
Table 2-8. Rosemount 8711 Torque Specifications
2.11
Size code
Line size
Pound-feet
Newton-meter
015
1.5-in. (40 mm)
15
20
020
2-in. (50 mm)
25
34
030
3-in. (80 mm)
40
54
040
4-in. (100 mm)
30
41
060
6-in. (150 mm)
50
68
080
8-in. (200 mm)
70
95
Process reference connection
Figures 2-10 through 2-13 illustrate process reference connections only. Earth safety ground is
also required as part of the installation, but is not shown in the figures. Follow national, local,
and plant electrical codes for safety ground.
Use Table 2-9 to determine which process reference option to follow for proper installation.
Installation
19
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table 2-9. Process Reference Installation
Process reference options
Grounding
straps
Grounding rings
Reference
electrode
Lining
protectors
Conductive
Unlined Pipe
See Figure 2-10
See Figure 2-11(1)
See Figure 2-13(1)
See Figure 2-11(1)
Conductive
Lined Pipe
Insufficient
Grounding
See Figure 2-11
See Figure 2-10
See Figure 2-11
Non-Conductive
Pipe
Insufficient
Grounding
See Figure 2-12
Not Recommended
See Figure 2-12
Type of pipe
(1)
Grounding ring, reference electrode, and lining protectors are not required for process reference. Grounding straps per Figure 2-10 are sufficient.
Note
For line sizes 10-inch and larger, the ground strap may come attached to the sensor body near
the flange. See Figure 2-14.
Figure 2-10. Grounding Straps in Conductive Unlined Pipe or Reference Electrode in Lined
Pipe
20
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Figure 2-11. Grounding with Grounding Rings or Lining Protectors in Conductive Pipe
Figure 2-12. Grounding with Grounding Rings or Lining Protectors in Non-conductive Pipe
Installation
21
Section 2: Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Figure 2-13. Grounding with Reference Electrode in Conductive Unlined Pipe
Figure 2-14. Grounding for Line Sizes 10-in. and Larger
22
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
2.12
August 2015
Wiring the transmitter
This section covers the wiring between the transmitter and sensor, the Modbus output, and
supplying power to the transmitter. Follow the conduit, cable, and electrical disconnect
requirements in the sections below.
For sensor wiring diagrams, see Electrical Drawing 08732-1504 in Appendix D Wiring Diagrams.
For hazardous locations, see the Installation Drawings 08732-2062 in Appendix B Approval
Information.
For information on connecting to another manufacturer’s sensor, refer to Appendix E
Implementing a Universal Transmitter.
2.12.1
Conduit entries and connections
Conduit entries for the transmitter and sensor are available with 1/2-inch NPT or M20
connections. Conduit connections should be made in accordance with national, local, and plant
electrical codes. Unused conduit entries should be sealed with the appropriate certified plugs.
The flow sensor is rated IP68 to a depth of 33 feet (10 meters) for 48 hours. For sensor
installations requiring IP68 protection, the cable glands, conduit, and conduit plugs must be
rated for IP68. The plastic shipping plugs do not provide ingress protection.
2.12.2
Installation
Conduit requirements

For installations with an intrinsically safe electrode circuit, a separate conduit for the coil
cable and the electrode cable may be required. See drawing 08732-2062 in Appendix B.

For installations with non-intrinsically safe electrode circuit, or when using the combination
cable, a single dedicated conduit run for the coil drive and electrode cable between the
sensor and the remote transmitter may be acceptable. Bundled cables from other equipment
in a single conduit are likely to create interference and noise in the system. See Figure 2-15.

Electrode cables should not be run together and should not be in the same cable tray with
power cables.

Output cables should not be run together with power cables.

Select conduit size appropriate to feed cables through to the flowmeter.
23
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Figure 2-15. Best Practice Conduit Preparation
A
B
B
C
D
A. Power
B. Output
C. Coil
D. Electrode
2.12.3
Connecting sensor to transmitter
Integral mount transmitters
Integral mount transmitters ordered with a sensor will be shipped assembled and wired at the
factory using an interconnecting cable. (See Figure 2-16). Use only the socket module or IMS
cable provided by Emerson™ Process Management.
For replacement transmitters, use the existing interconnecting cable from the original
assembly. Replacement cables are available.
Figure 2-16. Interconnecting Cables
Remote mount transmitters
Cables kits are available as individual component cables or as a combination coil/electrode
cable. Remote cables can be ordered direct from Rosemount using the kit numbers shown in
Table 2-10. Equivalent Alpha cable part numbers are also provided as an alternative. To order
cable, specify length as quantity desired. Equal length of component cables is required.
Example: 25 feet = Qty (25) 08732-0065-0001
24
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table 2-10. Component Cable Kits
Standard temperature (-20°C to 75°C)
Cable kit #
Description
Individual cable
Alpha p/n
08732-0065-0001
(feet)
Kit, Component Cables, Std
Temp. Coil + Electrode
Coil
Electrode
518243
518245
08732-0065-0002
(meters)
Kit, Component Cables, Std
Temp. Coil + Electrode
Coil
Electrode
518243
518245
08732-0065-0003
(feet)
Kit, Component Cables, Std
Temp. Coil + I.S. Electrode
Coil
Intrinsically Safe Blue
Electrode
518243
518244
08732-0065-0004
(meters)
Kit, Component Cables, Std
Temp. Coil + I.S. Electrode
Coil
Intrinsically Safe Blue
Electrode
518243
518244
Individual cable
Alpha p/n
Extended temperature (-50°C to 125°C)
Cable kit #
Description
08732-0065-1001
(feet)
Kit, Component Cables,
Ext Temp. Coil + Electrode
Coil
Electrode
840310
518189
08732-0065-1002
(meters)
Kit, Component Cables,
Ext Temp. Coil + Electrode
Coil
Electrode
840310
518189
08732-0065-1003
(feet)
Kit, Component Cables,
Ext Temp. Coil + I.S. Electrode
Coil
Intrinsically Safe Blue
Electrode
840310
840309
08732-0065-1004
(meters)
Kit, Component Cables,
Ext Temp. Coil + I.S. Electrode
Coil
Intrinsically Safe Blue
Electrode
840310
840309
Table 2-11. Combination Cable Kits
Coil and electrode cable (-20°C to 80°C)
Cable Kit #
Description
08732-0065-2001
(feet)
08732-0065-2002
(meters)
Kit, Combination Cable,
Standard
08732-0065-3001
(feet)
08732-0065-3002
(meters)
Installation
Kit, Combination Cable,
Submersible
(80°C dry/60°C Wet)
(33ft continuous)
25
Section 2: Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Cable requirements
Shielded twisted pairs or triads must be used. For installations using the individual coil drive and
electrode cable, see Figure 2-17. Cable lengths should be limited to less than 500 feet (152 m).
Consult factory for length between 500–1000 feet (152–304 m). Equal length cable is required
for each.
For installations using the combination coil drive/electrode cable, see Figure 2-18. Combination
cable lengths should be limited to less than 330 feet (100 m).
Figure 2-17. Individual Component Cables
Figure 2-18. Combination Coil / Electrode Cable
26
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Cable preparation
When preparing all wire connections, remove only the insulation required to fit the wire
completely under the terminal connection. Prepare the ends of the coil drive and electrode
cables as shown in Figure 2-19. Limit the unshielded wire length to less than one inch on both
the coil drive and electrode cables. Any length of unsheathed conductor should be insulated.
Excessive removal of insulation may result in an unwanted electrical short to the transmitter
housing or other wire connections. Excessive unshielded lead length, or failure to connect cable
shields properly, may expose the unit to electrical noise, resulting in an unstable meter reading.
Figure 2-19. Cable Ends
Shock Hazard
Potential shock hazard across remote junction box terminals 1 & 2 (40V).
Explosion Hazard
Electrodes exposed to process. Use only compatible transmitter and approved installation
practices.
For process temperatures greater than 284 °F (140 °C), use a wire rated for 257 °F (125 °C).
Installation
27
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Figure 2-20. Remote Junction Box Views
Transmitter
Sensor
Wire
Terminal
Wire
Terminal
RED
1
RED
1
BLUE
2
BLUE
2
BLACK
17
Shield
3
YELLOW
18
BLACK
17
WHITE
19
YELLOW
18
WHITE
19
For sensor wiring diagrams, see Appendix D Wiring Diagrams. For hazardous locations, see
Appendix B Approval Information.
2.12.4
8732EM terminal block connections
Remove the back cover of the transmitter to access the terminal block. See Figure 2-21 for
terminal identification. To connect pulse output and/or discrete input/output, see Section 3:
Advanced Installation Details. Installations with intrinsically safe outputs should reference the
hazardous location installation drawings in Appendix B Approval Information.
Figure 2-21. Terminal Block Connections
Modbus (B)
Modbus (A)
28
Modbus (B)
Modbus (A)
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
2.12.5
August 2015
Modbus output
The modbus output is a modbus RTU signal using RS-485. Follow these cable recommendations
for RS-485 interface (Modbus over serial line).
Cable characteristics
Type
Shielded twisted pair cable with 2 conductors and a
drain wire, or Ethernet cable of Cat 5/5e/6
Conductor gauge
20–24 AWG for lengths up to 1000 feet
16–20 AWG for lengths up to 4000 feet
Characteristic impedance
100–130 ohm
Conductor-to-conductor
capacitance
<30 pF/ft
Conductor-to-shield
capacitance
<60 pF/ft
Voltage rating
300 V/600 V
Recommended insulation
material
PVC (<1000 ft) or PE (1000 ft)
Bus cable
Bus to be connected device to device. For example, daisy chained (not star connected).
Maximum 4000 feet depending on speeds, cable, and loads.
Cable shield must be grounded at only one point.
Due to the use of galvanically isolated Modbus connections, a third common wire is not
necessary for this product. If a 3-conductor cable is used, the third wire should be left
unterminated and insulated from ground.
Derivations (spurs)
Avoid derivations (spurs) when possible. If required, derivations from the bus must be as short
as possible (65 feet maximum).
Termination
A single 120 ohm terminator should be placed at each physical end of the bus (at the two most
remote bus devices) to minimize reflections in the transmission cable. Do not place terminators
on a spur connection.
Modbus wiring
The modbus signal is a 24VDC active output.
Wire terminal 1 (B/D1) and terminal 2 (A/D0). See Figure 2-22.
Installation
29
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Figure 2-22. Modbus Wiring—Internal Power
Modbus
Modbus B/D1
2.12.6
Powering the transmitter
The 8732EM transmitter is available in two models. The AC powered transmitter is designed to
be powered by 90–250VAC (50/60Hz). The DC powered transmitter is designed to be powered
by 12–42VDC. Before connecting power to the Rosemount 8732EM, be sure to have the proper
power supply, conduit, and other accessories. Wire the transmitter according to national, local,
and plant electrical requirements for the supply voltage. See Figure 2-23 or Figure 2-24.
Supply Current (DC Amps)
Figure 2-23. DC Power Requirements
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
12
16
20
24
28
32
36
40
Power Supply (DC Volts)
Peak inrush is 42A at 42VDC supply, lasting approximately 1ms.
Inrush for other supply voltages can be estimated with:
Inrush (Amps) = Supply (Volts) / 1.0
30
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Figure 2-24. AC Power Requirements
AC Supply Characteristics
Supply Current (Amps)
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
90
110
130
150
170
190
210
230
250
Power Supply (VAC)
Apparent Power (VA)
Apparent Power (VA)
34
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
90
110
130
150
170
190
210
230
250
Power Supply (VAC)
Peak inrush is 35.7A at 250VAC supply, lasting approximately 1ms
Inrush for other supply voltages can be estimated with:
Inrush (Amps) = Supply (Volts) / 7.0
Supply wire requirements
Use 10–18 AWG wire rated for the proper temperature of the application. For wire 10–14 AWG
use lugs or other appropriate connectors. For connections in ambient temperatures above
122 °F (50 °C), use a wire rated for 194 °F (90 °C). For DC powered transmitters with extended
cable lengths, verify there is a minimum of 12VDC at the terminals of the transmitter with the
device under load.
Installation
31
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Electrical disconnect requirements
Connect the device through an external disconnect or circuit breaker per national and local
electrical code.
Installation category
The installation category for the 8732EM is OVERVOLTAGE CAT II.
Overcurrent protection
The 8732EM Transmitter requires overcurrent protection of the supply lines. Fuse rating and
compatible fuses are shown in Table 2-12.
Table 2-12. Fuse Requirements
Input
voltage
Fuse rating
Compatible fuse
90–250VAC
rms
1 Amp, 250V, I2t  1.5 A2s
Rating, Fast Acting
Bussman AGC-1, Littelfuse 31201.5HXP
12–42VDC
3 Amp, 250V, I2t  14 A2s
Rating, Fast Acting
Bel Fuse 3AG 3-R, Littelfuse 312003P, Schurter 0034.5135
Power terminals
See Figure 2-21 for terminal block connections.
For AC powered transmitter (90–250VAC, 50/60 Hz):

Connect AC Neutral to terminal 9 (AC N/L2) and AC Line to terminal 10 (AC/L1).
For DC powered transmitter:
32

Connect negative to terminal 9 (DC -) and positive to terminal 10 (DC +).

DC powered units may draw up to 1.2A.
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
2.13
August 2015
Cover jam screw
For flow meters shipped with a cover jam screw, the screw should be installed after the
instrument has been wired and powered up. Follow these steps to install the cover jam screw:
1. Verify the cover jam screw is completely threaded into the housing.
2. Install the housing cover and verify the cover is tight against the housing.
3. Using a 2.5 mm hex wrench, loosen the jam screw until it contacts the transmitter cover.
4. Turn the jam screw an additional 1/2 turn counterclockwise to secure the cover.
Note
Application of excessive torque may strip the threads.
5. Verify the cover cannot be removed.
2.14
Modbus configuration
Note
Each register is identified by its address (or starting address). Depending on the PLC used to
communicate with the transmitter, you may need to subract 1 from the address or starting
address of the register. Refer to your PLC documentation to know if this applies to you.
2.14.1
Local operator interface
To activate the LOI, press the DOWN arrow. Use the UP, DOWN, LEFT (E), and RIGHT arrows to
navigate the menu structure. Maps of the LOI menus are shown in Section 4: Operation.
The display can be locked to prevent unintentional configuration changes. The display lock can
be activated by holding the UP arrow for three seconds and then following the on-screen
instructions.
When the display lock is activated, a lock symbol will appear in the lower right hand corner of
the display. To deactivate the display lock, hold the UP arrow for 3 seconds and follow the
on-screen instructions. Once deactivated, the lock symbol will no longer appear in the lower
right hand corner of the display.
Address (register 109)
Configures the address of the transmitter for the Modbus network.
Installation
33
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Floating point byte order (register 110)
Sets the order that information is sent by the transmitter.
Register value
Byte order
0
0–1–2–3 (default)
1
2–3–0–1
2
1–0–3–2
3
3–2–1–0
Baud Rate (Register 115)
Sets the communication speed of the transmitter.
Register value
Baud rate
0
1200
1
2400
2
4800
3
9600
4
19200 (default)
5
38400
6
57600
7
115200
Parity (register 116)
Used to configure error-checking methodology for the data.
Register value
Parity
0
No parity
1
Odd
2
Even (default)
Stop bits (register 117)
Sets the last bit of the data packet.
34
Register value
Stop bits
1
1 bit (default)
2
2 bits
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
2.15
August 2015
Basic configuration
Once the magnetic flowmeter is installed and power has been supplied, the transmitter must be
configured through the basic setup. These parameters can be configured through either a local
operator interface or a modbus communication tool. Configuration settings are saved in
nonvolatile memory within the transmitter. A complete map of the modbus registries and
descriptions of the more advanced functions are available in Appendix C.
2.15.1
Basic setup
Tag (Registers 68–71)
Tag is the quickest and shortest way of identifying and distinguishing between transmitters.
Transmitters can be tagged according to the requirements of your application. The tag may be
up to eight characters long.
Flow units (Register 61)
The flow units variable specifies the format in which the flow rate will be displayed. Units should
be selected to meet your particular metering needs.
Volume Units
Register Value
Installation
Volume Units
Units
Register Value
Units
241
Barrels (31 gal) / sec
19
Cubic meters / hour
242
Barrels (31 gal) / min
29
Cubic meters / day
243
Barrels (31 gal) / hour
22
Gallons / second
244
Barrels (31 gal) / day
16
Gallons / minute
132
Barrels (42 gal) / sec
136
Gallons / hour
133
Barrels (42 gal) / min
235
Gallons / day
134
Barrels (42 gal) / hour
137
Imperial gallons / sec
135
Barrels (42 gal) / day
18
Imperial gallons / min
248
Cubic cm / minute
30
Imperial gallons / hour
26
Cubic feet / second
31
Imperial gallons / day
15
Cubic feet / minute
24
Liters / second
130
Cubic feet / hour
17
Liters / minute
27
Cubic feet / day
138
Liters / hour
28
Cubic meters / second
240
Liters / day
131
Cubic meters / minute
35
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Mass Units
1.
36
Other Units
Register Value
Units
Register Value
Units
73
Kilograms / second
20
Feet / second (default)
74
Kilograms / minute
21
Meters / second
75
Kilograms / hour
253
Special units1
76
Kilograms / day
77
Metric ton / minute
78
Metric ton / hour
79
Metric ton / day
80
Pounds / second
81
Pounds / minute
82
Pounds / hour
83
Pounds / day
84
Short tons / minute
85
Short tons / hour
86
Short tons / day
Refer to “Configure special units” in Section 5.
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 2: Installation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Line size (Register 65)
The line size (sensor size) must be set to match the actual sensor connected to the transmitter.
Register Value
Line Size
Register Value
Line Size
0
0.10-in. (2 mm)
18
16-in. (400 mm)
1
0.15-in. (4 mm)
19
18-in. (450 mm)
2
0.25-in. (6 mm)
20
20-in. (500 mm)
3
0.30-in. (8 mm)
21
24-in. (600 mm)
4
0.50-in. (15 mm)
22
28-in. (700 mm)
5
0.75-in. (18 mm)
23
30-in. (750 mm)
6
1-in. (25 mm)
24
32-in. (800 mm)
7
1.5-in. (40 mm)
25
36-in. (900 mm)
8
2-in. (50 mm)
26
40-in. (1000 mm)
9
2.5-in. (65 mm)
27
42-in. (1050 mm)
10
3-in. (80 mm) (default)
28
44-in. (1100 mm)
29
48-in. (1200 mm)
11
4-in. (100 mm)
30
54-in. (1350 mm)
12
5-in. (125 mm)
31
56-in. (1400 mm)
13
6-in. (150 mm)
32
60-in. (1500 mm)
14
8-in. (200 mm)
33
64-in. (1600 mm)
15
10-in. (250 mm)
34
66-in. (1650 mm)
16
12-in. (300 mm)
35
72-in. (1800 mm)
17
14-in. (350 mm)
36
78-in. (1950 mm)
Calibration number (Registers 413–420)
The sensor calibration number is a 16-digit number generated at the Rosemount factory during
flow calibration and is unique to each sensor and is located on the sensor tag.
Installation
37
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
38
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Installation
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Section 3
Advanced Installation Details
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connect discrete input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process reference connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coil housing configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1
page 39
page 39
page 39
page 41
page 47
page 48
page 48
Introduction
This section details some of the advanced installation considerations when utilizing the
Rosemount® 8700M Magnetic Flowmeter System.
3.2
Safety messages
The electronics may store energy after power is removed. Allow 10 minutes
for charge to dissipate prior to removing electronics compartment cover.
Note
The electronics stack is electrostatically sensitive. Be sure to observe handling precautions for
static-sensitive components.
3.3
Hardware switches
The electronics are equipped with two user-selectable hardware switches. These switches set
the Transmitter Security and Internal/External Pulse Power.
Definitions of these switches and their functions are provided below. To change the settings, see
below.
3.3.1
Transmitter security
The security switch on the 8732EM allows the user to lock out any configuration changes
attempted on the transmitter. No changes to the configuration are allowed when the switch is
in the ON position.
With the switch in the ON position, access to review the operating parameters is available. No
configuration changes are allowed.
Transmitter security is set in the OFF position when shipped from the factory.
Advanced Installation Details
39
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
3.3.2
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Internal/external pulse power
The 8732EM pulse loop may be powered internally or by an external power supply. The internal/external power supply switch determines the source of the pulse loop power.
Transmitters are shipped from the factory with the switch set in the EXTERNAL position.
A 5-28 VDC external supply is required when the pulse power switch is set to the EXTERNAL
position. For further information on the pulse external power, see “Connect pulse output” on
page 41.
3.3.3
Changing hardware switch settings
To change the switch settings, complete the steps below:
Note
The hardware switches are located on the top side of the electronics board and changing their
settings requires opening the electronics housing. If possible, carry out these procedures away
from the plant environment in order to protect the electronics.
1. Place the control loop into manual control.
2. Disconnect power to the transmitter
3. Remove the electronics compartment cover. If the cover has a cover jam screw, this must be
loosened prior to removal of the cover.
4. Remove the LOI, if applicable.
5. Identify the location of each switch (see Figure 3-1).
40
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Figure 3-1. Rosemount 8732EM Electronics Stack and Hardware Switches
6. Change the setting of the desired switches with a small, non-metallic tool.
7. Replace the LOI if applicable, and the electronics compartment cover. If the cover has a cover
jam screw, this must be tightened to comply with installation requirements. See “Cover jam
screw” on page 33 for details on the cover jam screw.
8. Return power to the transmitter and verify the flow measurement is correct.
9. Return the control loop to automatic control.
3.4
Additional loops
There are three additional loop connections available on the 8732EM Transmitter:
3.4.1

Pulse output - used for external or remote totalization.

Channel 1 can be configured as discrete input or discrete output.

Channel 2 can be configured as discrete output only.
Connect pulse output
The pulse output function provides a galvanically isolated frequency signal that is proportional
to the flow through the sensor. The signal is typically used in conjunction with an external
totalizer or control system. The default position of the internal/external pulse power switch is in
the EXTERNAL position. The user-selectable power switch is located on the electronics board.
External
For transmitters with the internal/external pulse power switch set in the EXTERNAL position, the
following requirements apply:
Advanced Installation Details
41
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Supply voltage: 5 to 28 VDC
Maximum current: 100 mA
Maximum power: 1.0 W
Load resistance: 200 to 10 kohms (typical value 1 kohms)
Pulse mode: Fixed pulse width or 50% duty cycle
Pulse duration: 0.1 to 650 ms (adjustable)
Maximum pulse frequency: 10,000 Hz
FET switch closure: solid state switch
Figure 3-2. Maximum Frequency vs. Cable Length
42
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Complete the following steps to connect an external power supply.
1. Ensure the power source and connecting cable meet the requirements outlined previously.
2. Turn off the transmitter and pulse output power sources.
3. Run the power cable to the transmitter.
4. Connect - DC to terminal 3.
5. Connect + DC to terminal 4.
Refer to Figure 3-3 and Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-3. Connecting an Electromechanical Totalizer/Counter with External Power
Supply
Schematic showing
FET between
terminal 3 and 4
5-24 V DC
Power Supply
Electro-mechanical
Counter
Note
Total loop impedance must be sufficient to keep loop current below maximum rating. A resistor
can be added in the loop to raise impedance.
Advanced Installation Details
43
Reference Manual
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Figure 3-4. Connecting to an Electronic Totalizer/Counter with External Power Supply
Schematic showing
FET between
terminal 3 and 4
Electronic
Counter
5-24 V DC
Power Supply
Note
Total loop impedance must be sufficient to keep loop current below maximum rating.
44
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Internal
When the pulse switch is set to internal, the pulse loop will be powered from the transmitter.
Supply voltage from the transmitter can be up to 12 VDC. Refer to Figure 3-5 and connect the
transmitter directly to the counter. Internal pulse power can only be used with an electronic
totalizer or counter and cannot be used with an electromechanical counter.
1. Turn off the transmitter.
2. Connect - DC to terminal 3.
3. Connect + DC to terminal 4.
Figure 3-5. Connecting to an Electronic Totalizer / Counter with Internal Power Supply
Schematic showing
FET between
terminal 3 and 4
Electronic
Counter
Advanced Installation Details
45
Reference Manual
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
3.4.2
Connect discrete output
The discrete output control function can be configured to drive an external signal to indicate
zero flow, reverse flow, empty pipe, diagnostic status, flow limit, or transmitter status. The
following requirements apply:
Supply Voltage: 5 to 28 VDC
Maximum Voltage: 28 VDC at 240 mA
Switch Closure: solid state relay
For discrete output control, connect the power source and control relay to the transmitter. To
connect external power for discrete output control, complete the following steps:
1. Ensure the power source and connecting cable meet the requirements outlined previously.
2. Turn off the transmitter and discrete power sources.
3. Run the power cable to the transmitter.
4. Channel 1: Connect -DC to terminal 5, connect +DC to terminal 6.
5. Channel 2: Connect -DC to terminal 7, connect +DC to terminal 8.
Refer to Figure 3-6 and Figure 3.5.
Figure 3-6. Connect Discrete Output to Relay or Control System Input
Control Relay
or Input
5-28 V DC
Power Supply
Note
Total loop impedance must be sufficient to keep loop current below maximum rating. A resistor
can be added in the loop to raise impedance.
46
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
3.4.3
August 2015
Connect discrete input
The discrete input can provide positive zero return (PZR) or totalizer A reset if totalizer A is
configured as resettable. See Section 5. The following requirements apply:
Supply Voltage: 5 to 28 VDC
Control Current: 1.5 - 20mA
Input Impedance: 2.5 k  plus 1.2V Diode drop. See Figure 3-8.
To connect the discrete input, complete the following steps.
1. Ensure the power source and connecting cable meet the requirements outlined previously.
2. Turn off the transmitter and discrete power sources.
3. Run the power cable to the transmitter.
4. Connect -DC to terminal 5.
5. Connect +DC to terminal 6.
Refer to Figure 3-7 and Figure 3-8.
Figure 3-7. Connecting Discrete Input
Relay Contact or Control
System Output
5-28 V DC
Power Supply
Advanced Installation Details
47
Reference Manual
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Figure 3-8. Discrete Input Operating Range
30
25
Supply Voltage
Digital Input Operating Range
20
15
10
5
0
0
2.5
5
7.5
10
12.5
15
Series Resistance Ωin + Ωext (kohms)
3.5
Process reference connection
Establishing a process reference for the sensor is one of the most important details of sensor
installation. Proper process reference creates the lowest noise environment for the transmitter
to make a stable reading. Refer to Table 2-9 on page 20 to determine which option to follow for
proper installation.
Note
Consult factory for installations requiring cathodic protection or situations where there are high
electrical currents or high electrical potentials present in the process.
3.6
Coil housing configuration
The coil housing provides physical protection of the coils and other internal components from
contamination and physical damage that might occur in an industrial environment. The coil
housing is an all-welded and gasket-free design.
The 8705 model is available in five coil housing configurations. Configurations are identified by
the M0, M1, M2, M3, or M4 options codes found in the model number. The 8711 and 8721
models are only available in one coil housing coil configuration; a separate option code is not
available.
48
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
3.6.1
August 2015
Standard coil housing configuration
The standard coil housing configuration is a factory sealed all-welded enclosure and is available
for the following models (see Figure 3-9):

8705 with option code M0 - 8705xxxxxxxxM0

8711 with option code M/L - 8711xxxxxxM/L

8721 with option code R/U - 8721xxxxxxR/U
Figure 3-9. Standard Housing Configuration (8705 Shown)
Advanced Installation Details
49
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
3.6.2
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Process leak protection (option M1)
The 8705 is available with process leak detection through the use of a threaded connection and
pressure relief valve (PRV). This coil housing configuration is a factory sealed all-welded
enclosure. The M1 configuration is available for the 8705 only.

8705 with option code M1 - 8705xxxxxxxxM1
A PRV can be installed in the threaded connection to prevent possible over-pressuring of the coil
housing caused by a primary seal failure. The PRV is capable of venting fugitive emissions when
pressure inside the coil housing exceeds five psi. Additional piping may be connected to the PRV
to drain any process leakage to a safe location (see Figure 3-10).
In the event of a primary seal failure, this configuration will not protect the coils or other internal
components of the sensor from exposure to the process fluid.
Note
The PRV is supplied with the meter to be installed by the customer. Installation of the PRV and
any associated piping must be performed in accordance with environmental and hazardous area
requirements.
Figure 3-10. 8705 with M1 Coil Housing Configuration and PRV
50
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
3.6.3
August 2015
Process leak containment (Option M2 or M4)
The 8705 is available with process leak containment. The coil housing configuration is a factory
sealed all-welded enclosure with the addition of sealed electrode compartments. The M2/M4
configuration is available for the 8705 only.

8705 with option code M2/M4 - 8705xxxxxxxxM2/M4
This configuration divides the coil housing into separate compartments, one for each electrode
and one for the coils. In the event of a primary seal failure, the fluid is contained in the electrode
compartment. The sealed electrode compartment prevents the process fluid from entering the
coil compartment where it may damage the coils and other internal components. The electrode
compartments are designed to contain the process fluid up to a maximum pressure of 740 psig.

Code M2 - sealed, welded coil housing with separate sealed and welded electrode
compartments (see Figure 3-11).

Code M4 - sealed, welded coil housing with separate sealed and welded electrode
compartments with a threaded port on the electrode tunnel cap, capable of venting fugitive
emissions (see Figure 3-12).
Note
To properly vent process fluid from the electrode compartment to a safe location, additional
piping is required and must be installed by the user. Installation of any associated piping must be
performed in accordance with environmental and hazardous area requirements. In the event of
primary seal failure, the electrode compartment may be pressurized. Use caution when
removing the cap screw.
Figure 3-11. 8705 with M2 Coil Housing Configuration
Advanced Installation Details
51
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Figure 3-12. 8705 with M4 Coil Housing Configuration
3.6.4
Process Leak Containment with Electrode Access (Option
M3)
The 8705 is available with Process Leak Containment and Electrode Access. The coil housing
configuration is a factory sealed, all-welded enclosure with the addition of sealed electrode
compartments that include access covers. The M3 configuration is available on the 8705 only.

8705 with option code M3 - 8705xxxxxxxxM3
This configuration divides the coil housing into separate compartments, one for each electrode
and one for the coils. In the event of a primary seal failure, the fluid is contained in the electrode
compartment. The sealed electrode compartment prevents the process fluid from entering the
coil compartment where it may damage the coils and other internal components. The electrode
compartments are designed to contain the process fluid up to a maximum pressure of 740 psig.
Note
To properly vent process fluid from the electrode compartment to a safe location, additional
piping is required and must be installed by the user. Installation of any associated piping must be
performed in accordance with environmental and hazardous area requirements. In the event of
primary seal failure, the electrode compartment may be pressurized. Use caution when
removing the cap screw.
52
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Figure 3-13. 8705 with M3 Coil Housing Configuration
3.6.5
Higher temperature applications and sensor insulation best
practices
Insulation of the magnetic flowmeter sensor is not typically recommended. However, in
applications with higher temperature process fluids (above 150°F / 65°C), plant safety, sensor
reliability, and sensor longevity can be improved with careful attention to proper insulation.
1. In applications where process fluid permeation of the liner has been observed or may be
expected, the rate of permeation can be reduced by decreasing the temperature gradient
between the process fluid and the outside of the meter body. In these applications only the
space between the process flanges and the coil housing should be insulated (see
Figure 3-14).
Advanced Installation Details
53
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
August 2015
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Figure 3-14. Insulating a Rosemount Magnetic Flowmeter for Permeation
2. When insulation of the magnetic flowmeter sensor is required due to plant safety standards
designed to protect personnel from contact burns, extend the insulation up to the coil
housing, covering both ends of the sensor and flanges (Figure 3-15). The insulation should
NOT cover the coil housing or the terminal junction box. Insulating the coil housing and the
terminal junction box can result in overheating of the coil compartment and terminals,
resulting in erratic/erroneous flow readings and potential damage or failure of the meter.
54
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
August 2015
Figure 3-15. Insulating a Rosemount Magnetic Flowmeter for Safety/Plant Standards
Advanced Installation Details
55
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
August 2015
56
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Advanced Installation Details
Section 4: Operation
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Section 4
Operation
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 57
Local operator interface (LOI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 57
4.1
Introduction
The 8732EM Transmitter features a full range of software functions, transmitter configurations,
and diagnostic settings. These features can be accessed through the Local Operator Interface
(LOI), ProLink III configuration software, or a host control system. Configuration variables may
be changed at any time; specific instructions are provided through on-screen instructions.
This section covers the basic features of the LOI (optional) and provides general instructions on
how to navigate the configuration menus using the optical buttons. The section also provides a
menu tree to help access each function.
For detailed LOI configuration refer to Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality.
4.2
Local operator interface (LOI)
The optional LOI provides a communications center for the 8732EM.
The LOI allows an operator to:
Operation

Change transmitter configuration

View flow and totalizer values

Start/stop and reset totalizer values

Run diagnostics and view the results

Monitor transmitter status

Other functions
57
Reference Manual
Section 4: Operation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
4.2.1
Basic features
The basic features of the LOI include a display window and four navigational arrow keys (see
Figure 4-1).
To activate the LOI, press the DOWN arrow. Use the UP, DOWN, LEFT (E), and RIGHT arrows to
navigate the menu structure. Maps of the LOI menus are shown in Figures 4-2 through 4-5.
Figure 4-1. Local Operator Interface Keypad and Character Display
Display Window
LEFT (E), RIGHT
Navigational Arrow Keys
UP, DOWN
Navigational Arrow Keys
58
Operation
Reference Manual
Section 4: Operation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
4.2.2
August 2015
Data entry
The LOI keypad does not have alphanumeric keys. Alphanumeric and symbolic data is entered
by the following procedure. Use the steps below to access the appropriate functions.
4.2.3
1.
Use the arrow keys to navigate the menu structure in order to access the appropriate
alphanumeric parameter. See Figures 4-2 through 4-5.
2.
Use the UP, DOWN or RIGHT arrow key to begin editing the parameter. (Use the LEFT
arrow key to go back without changing the value).

For numerical data, toggle through the digits 0-9, decimal point, and dash.

For alphabetical data, toggle through the letters of the alphabet A-Z, digits 0-9,
and the symbols ?, &, +, -, *, /, $, @,%, and the blank space.
3.
Use the RIGHT arrow key to highlight each character you want to change and then use
the UP or DOWN arrow keys to select the value. If you go past a character that you wish
to change, keep using the RIGHT arrow key to wrap around in order to arrive at the
character you want to change.
4.
Press “E” (the LEFT arrow key) when all changes are complete to save the entered
values. Press the LEFT arrow key again to navigate back to the menu tree.
Data entry examples
Press the DOWN arrow key to access the menu structures. See Figures 4-2 through 4-5. Use the
arrow keys to navigate to the desired parameters to review/change. Parameter values are
classified as table values or select values. Table values are available from a predefined list. For
parameters such as Line Size or Flow Units. Select values are integers, floating point numbers, or
character strings, and are entered one character at a time using the arrow keys for parameters
such as Cal Number.
Table value example
Setting the sensor size:
1.
Press the DOWN arrow key to access the Basic Setup menu. See Figure 4-4.
2.
Using the arrow keys, select Line Size from the Basic Setup menu.
3.
Press the UP or DOWN arrow key to increase or decrease the sensor size to the next
value.
4.
When you reach the desired sensor size, press “E” (the LEFT arrow key).
5.
Set the loop to manual if necessary, and press “E” again.
After a moment, the LOI will display VALUE STORED SUCCESSFULLY and then display the
selected value.
Operation
59
Reference Manual
Section 4: Operation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Select value example
Changing the calibration number:
1.
Press the DOWN arrow key to access the Basic Setup menu. See Figure 4-4.
2.
Using the arrow keys, select Cal Number from the Basic Setup menu.
3.
Press the RIGHT arrow key to position the cursor.
4.
Press the UP or DOWN arrow key to set the number.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 until desired number is displayed, press “E” (the LEFT arrow key).
6.
Set the loop to manual if necessary, and press “E” again.
After a moment, the LOI will display VALUE STORED SUCCESSFULLY and then display the
selected value.
4.2.4
Dynamic variable display pause
To make dynamically changing variables easier to read and record, a pause feature has been built
into the LOI. When viewing a dynamic variable (such as a totalizer value) from the view variable
screen, press the RIGHT arrow key to pause the display value. To return the screen to the
dynamic display mode, press the RIGHT arrow key again, or exit the screen by pressing the LEFT
arrow key.
Note
It is important to note this feature pauses only the display. While the display is paused, the
transmitter continues to measure all variables dynamically, and continues to increment the
totalizer.
4.2.5
Totalizer functionality
Totalizer selection
To view the totalizer values, press the DOWN arrow one time to access the LOI menu structure.
The first option is the totalizers. Under this section, you can view the totalizer and configure the
totalizers. Consult section 5.2.3: Totalizers for more information on the totalizer functionality.
Start / stop totalizer
Totalizers can be started or stopped individually, or simultaneously through a start/stop all
command. Consult section 5.2.3: Totalizers for details.
Read totalizer
Totalizer values can also be read through the LOI. This feature provides a dynamic value of the
totalizer to enable easy recording of the value. The totalizer will continue to operate in the
background when the read screen is paused. Refer to section 5.2.3: Totalizers for more details.
60
Operation
Reference Manual
Section 4: Operation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Reset totalizer
The totalizers can be configured to be reset through the LOI. They can be reset individually, or
simultaneously through a global command. For details on configuring the reset functionality
and on resetting the totalizers, refer to section 5.2.3: Totalizers.
4.2.6
Display lock
The 8732EM Transmitter has display lock functionality to prevent unintentional configuration
changes. The display can be locked manually or configured to automatically lock after a set
period of time. The display is always locked on the flow screen.
Manual display lock
From the flow screen, activate the display lock by holding the UP arrow for 3 seconds and then
following the on-screen instructions. When the display lock is activated, a lock symbol will
appear in the lower right hand corner of the display. To deactivate the display lock, hold the UP
arrow for 3 seconds and follow the on-screen instructions. Once deactivated, the lock symbol
will no longer appear in the lower right hand corner of the display.
Auto display lock
1.
Press the DOWN arrow key to access the Detailed Setup menu. See Figure 4-5.
2.
Using the arrow keys, select LOI Config from the Detailed Setup menu.
3.
Press DOWN arrow to highlight Disp Auto Lock and press the RIGHT arrow to enter the
menu.
4.
Press DOWN arrow to select the auto lock time.
5.
When you reach the desired time, press “E” (the left arrow).
6.
Set the loop to manual if necessary, and press “E” again.
After a moment, the LOI will display VALUE STORED SUCCESSFULLY and then display the
selected value. When the auto display lock activates, it will cause the display to return to the
flow screen.
4.2.7
Diagnostic messages
Diagnostic messages may appear on the LOI. See Table 6-1 on page 93, Table 6-2 on page 110,
and Table 6-3 on page 111 for a complete list of messages, potential causes, and corrective
actions for these messages.
Operation
61
Section 4: Operation
4.2.8
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Display symbols
When certain transmitter functions are active, a symbol will appear in the lower-right corner of
the display. The possible symbols include the following:
Display Lock
Totalizer
Reverse flow
Continuous meter verification
62
Operation
Operation
Detailed Setup
Basic Setup
Diagnostics
Totalizers
View Total A
View Total B
View Total C
Config/Control
Status All
Start All
Stop All
Reset All
Total A
Total B
Total C
Security
LOI Control
Write Protect
TotC Direction
TotC Units
TotC Reset Cfg
LOI Start/Stop
LOI Reset
WP Start/Stop
WP Reset
Reset Total C
Total C Config
Reset Total B
Total B Config
TotB Direction
TotB Units
TotB Reset Cfg
Reset Total A
Total A Config
REV AJ
TotA Direction
TotA Units
TotA Reset Cfg
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Figure 4-2. Totalizers Menu Map
63
64
REV AJ
Modbus Diag
Diag Controls
Basic Diag
Advanced Diag
Variables
Trims
Status
Digital Trim
37Hz Auto Zero
Universal Trim
Ground/Wiring
Process Noise
Elec Coating
Meter Verif
Licensing
Self Test
Pulse Out Test
Empty Pipe
Elect Temp
Flow Limit 1
Flow Limit 2
Total Limit
Empty Pipe
Elect Temp
Line Noise
5Hz SNR
37Hz SNR
Elec Coating
Signal Power
37Hz Auto Zero
Coil Current
MV Results
Empty Pipe
Process Noise
Ground/Wiring
Elec Coating
Elect Temp
Reverse Flow
Cont Meter Ver
License Status
License Key
Process Noise
Ground/Wiring
Elec Coating
Meter Verif
DI/DO
Manual Results
Continual Res
No Flow
Flowing, Full
Empty Pipe
Continual
Coil Resist
Coil Inductnce
Electrode Res
Manual Measure
Continual Meas
Manual Results
Continual Res
Values
Reset Baseline
Recall Values
EC Current Val
EC Max Value
Run Meter Ver
View Results
Sensr Baseline
Test Criteria
Measurements
EC Current Val
EC Limit 1
EC Limit 2
EC Max Value
Reset Max Val
EP Control
EP Value
EP Trig Level
EP Counts
Coils
Electrodes
Transmitter
Modbus Status
Listen Only MD
Restart MB Com
Reset MB Confg
Test Criteria
Sim Velocity
Actual Velocity
Flow Sim Dev
Coil Inductnce
Sensor Cal Dev
Coil Resist
Electrode Res
Test Condition
Test Criteria
MV Results
Sim Velocity
Actual Velocity
Flow Sim Dev
Xmtr Cal Verify
Sensor Cal Dev
Sensor Cal
Coil Circuit
Electrode Ckt
Coil Resist
Coil Inductnce
Electrode Res
Actual Velocity
Flow Sim Dev
Coil Resist
Coil Inductnce
Actual Velocity
Electrode Res
Test Criteria
Sim Velocity
Actual Velocity
Flow Sim Dev
Coil Inductnce
Sensor Cal Dev
Coil Resist
Electrode Res
Test Condition
Test Criteria
MV Results
Sim Velocity
Actual Velocity
Flow Sim Dev
Xmtr Cal Verify
Sensor Cal Dev
Sensor Cal
Coil Circuit
Electrode Ckt
August 2015
Detailed Setup
Basic Setup
Diagnostics
Totalizers
Section 4: Operation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Reference Manual
Figure 4-3. Diagnostics Menu Map
Operation
Operation
Detailed Setup
Basic Setup
Diagnostics
Totalizers
Modbus
Tag
Flow Units
Line Size
Cal Number
Damping
Flow Units
Special Units
Total A Units
Total B Units
Total C Units
Address
Flt Pt Order
Baud Rate
Parity
Stop Bits
Min Resp Delay
Variable Slots
Slot Indices
Slot Variables
Var Slot 0 Val
Var Slot 1 Val
Var Slot 2 Val
Var Slot 3 Val
Var Slot 4 Val
Var Slot 5 Val
Var Slot 6 Val
Var Slot 7 Val
Var Slot 8 Val
Var Slot 9 Val
REV AJ
Var Slot 0 Idx
Var Slot 1 Idx
Var Slot 2 Idx
Var Slot 3 Idx
Var Slot 4 Idx
Var Slot 5 Idx
Var Slot 6 Idx
Var Slot 7 Idx
Var Slot 8 Idx
Var Slot 9 Idx
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Figure 4-4. Basic Setup Menu Map
65
66
REV AJ
More Params
Output Config
LOI Config
Sig Processing
Device Info
Device Reset
Operating Mode
SP Config
Coil Frequency
Damping
Lo-Flow Cutoff
Modbus
Pulse
DI/DO Config
Reverse Flow
Coil Frequency
Proc Density
Flow LSL
Flow USL
Flow Display
Language
Disp Auto Lock
Backlight
DI/O 1
DO 2
Flow Limit 1
Flow Limit 2
Total Limit
Diag Alert
Address
Flt Pt Order
Baud Rate
Parity
Stop Bits
Min Resp Delay
Variable Slots
Pulse Scaling
Pulse Width
Pulse Mode
Test
Software Rev
Final Asmbl #
Control 1
Mode 1
High Limit 1
Low Limit 1
Hysteresis
DI/O 1 Control
DI 1
DO 1
Var Slot 0 Idx
Var Slot 1 Idx
Var Slot 2 Idx
Var Slot 3 Idx
Var Slot 4 Idx
Var Slot 5 Idx
Var Slot 6 Idx
Var Slot 7 Idx
Var Slot 8 Idx
Var Slot 9 Idx
Control 2
Mode 2
High Limit 2
Low Limit 2
Hysteresis
Elec Failure
Coil Open Ckt
Empty Pipe
Reverse Flow
Ground/Wiring
Process Noise
Elect Temp
Elec Coat 1
Elec Coat 2
Cont Meter Ver
Coil Over Curr
Sensr Elec Sat
Coil Power Lim
Total Control
Total Mode
Tot Hi Limit
Tot Low Limit
Hysteresis
Var Slot 0 Val
Var Slot 1 Val
Var Slot 2 Val
Var Slot 3 Val
Var Slot 4 Val
Var Slot 5 Val
Var Slot 6 Val
Var Slot 7 Val
Var Slot 8 Val
Var Slot 9 Val
Tag
Description
Message
Device ID
Sensor S/N
Sensor Tag
Write protect
Revision Num
Slot Indices
Slot Variables
August 2015
Detailed Setup
Basic Setup
Diagnostics
Totalizers
Section 4: Operation
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Reference Manual
Figure 4-5. Detailed Setup Menu
Operation
Reference Manual
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Section 5
August 2015
Advanced Configuration
Functionality
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 67
Configure outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 67
Configure LOI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 85
Additional parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 87
5.1
Introduction
This section contains information for advanced configuration parameters.
The software configuration settings for the Rosemount 8732EM can be accessed through the
Local Operator Interface (LOI), ProLink® III, or through a control system. Before operating the
8732EM in an actual installation, you should review all of the factory set configuration data to
ensure they reflect the current application.
5.2
Configure outputs
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config
The configure outputs functionality is used to configure advanced features that control the
Modbus®, pulse, auxiliary, and totalizer outputs of the transmitter.
5.2.1
Modbus output
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Modbus
Configure the Modbus communication parameters.
Address
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Modbus, Address
Modbus register
109
Configure the address of the transmitter for the Modbus network. The acceptable range is an
integer value from 1 to 247. The default address is 1.
Each register is identified by its address (or starting address). Depending on the PLC that will be
used to communicate with the transmitter, you may need to subtract 1 from the address, or
starting address, of the register. Refer to PLC documentation to determine if this applies.
Advanced Configuration Functionality
67
Reference Manual
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Floating point byte order
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Modbus, Float Pt Order
Modbus register
110
Sets the order that information is sent by the transmitter.
Register value
Byte order
0
0–1–2–3 (default)
1
2–3–0–1
2
1–0–3–2
3
3–2–1–0
Baud rate
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Modbus, Baud Rate
Modbus register
115
Sets the communication speed of the transmitter.
Register value
Baud rate
0
1200
1
2400
2
4800
3
9600
4
19200 (default)
5
38400
6
57600
7
115200
Parity
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Modbus, Parity
Modbus register
116
Used to configure error-checking methodology for the data.
68
Register value
Parity
0
No parity
1
Odd
2
Even (default)
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Stop bits
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Modbus, Stop Bits
Modbus register
117
Sets the last bit of the data packet.
Register value
Stop bits
1
1 bit (default)
2
2 bits
Minimum response delay
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Modbus, Min Resp Delay
Modbus register
111
Minimum response delay is used to synchronize Modbus communications with hosts that operate
at a slower speed than the transmitter. The value specified here will be the minimum elapsed
time before the transmitter sends a response to the host. This value can be configured as an
integer from 0 to 250 ms. The default value is 10 ms.
Note
Do not set the minimum response delay unless required by the Modbus host.
Variable slots
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Modbus, Variable Slots
Variable slots allows for the customization of variables into fixed Modbus register locations. Up to
30 slots can be configured using ProLink III or a Modbus configuration tool. Through the LOI,
configuration functionality is limited to 10 slots.
Slot indices
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Modbus, Variable Slots, Slot Indices
Modbus registers
651–680
Assign variables to the various Modbus slots for easy reference. Slots 0 through 9 can be
configured through the LOI, ProLink III, or a Modbus configuration tool. Slots 10 through 29 can
only be configured through ProLink III or a Modbus configuration tool.
Advanced Configuration Functionality
69
Reference Manual
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Slot variables can be assigned to the slots. Refer to “Slot variables” on page 70.
Register value
Variable
0
Flow Rate
1
Pulse Output Frequency
2
Totalizer A
3
Totalizer B
4
Totalizer C
5
Electronics Temperature
6
Line Noise
7
5 Hz Signal to Noise Ratio
8
37 Hz Signal to Noise Ratio
9
Signal Power
10
Empty Pipe Value
11
Continuous Internal Flow Simulator Test Deviation
12
Electrode Coating Value
13
Continuous Electrode Resistance Value
14
Continuous Coil Resistance Value
15
Continuous Coil Inductance Value
16
Continuous Coil Inductance Deviation Value
Slot variables
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Modbus, Variable Slots, Slot Variables
Modbus registers
691–749
View the variable values indexed to slots 0 through 9 on the LOI. Slots 10 through 29 can only be
viewed through ProLink III or a Modbus configuration tool. These are read-only variables.
5.2.2
Pulse output
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Pulse
Under this function the pulse output of the 8732EM can be configured.
The Transmitter may be commanded to supply a specified frequency between 1 pulse/day at
39.37 ft/sec (12 m/s) to 10,000Hz at 1 ft/sec (0.3 m/s).
Pulse scaling factor
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Pulse, Pulse Scaling
Modbus register
327–328
The pulse scaling factor equates one transistor switch closure pulse to a selectable number of
flow units. The factor is a user-entered value between 0.0001 and 3,401,574.912 feet. The
default factor is 0.03 feet.
70
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Note
Line size, special units, and density must be selected prior to configuration of the pulse scaling
factor.
Note
The pulse output scaling is designed to operate between 0 and 10,000Hz. The minimum
conversion factor value is found by dividing the minimum span (in units of volume per second)
by 10,000Hz.
When selecting pulse output scaling, it is important to remember that the maximum pulse rate
is 10,000Hz. With the 110 percent over-range capability, the absolute limit is 11,000Hz.
For example:
If the Rosemount 8732EM pulses every time 0.01 gallons pass through the sensor—and the flow
rate is 10,000 gal/min—the 10,000Hz full-scale limit will be exceeded:
The best choice for this parameter depends upon the required resolution, the number of digits
in the totalizer, the extent of range required, and the maximum frequency limit of the external
counter.
Pulse factor units
Modbus register
37
The pulse factor unit assigns the unit of measure to the pulse scaling factor. The default
read-only value is the unit of measure from the configured flow units. For example, if gal/min is
selected when configuring the flow units, the pulse factor unit will be gallons.
Volume units
Mass units
Register value
Units
Register value
Units
40
Gallons
61
Kilograms
41
Liters
62
Metric tons
42
Imperial Gallons
63
Pounds
43
Cubic Meters
64
Short tons
46
Barrels (42 Gallons)
112
Cubic Feet
Register value
246
Cubic Centimeters
44
Feet
247
Barrels (31 Gallons)
45
Meters
253
Special Units(1)
Other units
Units
(1) See Section 5: Configure special units for details.
Advanced Configuration Functionality
71
Reference Manual
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Pulse width
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Pulse, Pulse Width
Modbus register
329–330
The width, or duration, of the pulse can be adjusted to match the requirements of different
counters or controllers (see Figure 5-1). These are typically lower frequency applications
(< 1000Hz). The transmitter will accept values from 0.1 ms to 650 ms. The factory default value
is 0.3 ms.
For frequencies higher than 1000Hz, it is recommended to set the pulse mode to 50% duty cycle
by setting the pulse mode to frequency output.
The pulse width will limit the maximum frequency output, If the pulse width is set too wide (more
than 1/2 the period of the pulse) the transmitter will limit the pulse output. See following
example.
Figure 5-1. Pulse Output
Example
If pulse width is set to 100 ms, the maximum output is 5Hz; for a pulse width of 0.5 ms, the
maximum output would be 1000Hz (at the maximum frequency output there is a 50% duty
cycle).
Pulse width
72
Minimum period (50% duty cycle)
100 ms
200 ms
0.5 ms
1.0 ms
Maximum frequency
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
To achieve the greatest maximum frequency output, set the pulse width to the lowest value
that is consistent with the requirements of the pulse output power source, pulse driven external
totalizer, or other peripheral equipment.
Example
The maximum flow rate is 10,000 gpm. Set the pulse output scaling such that the transmitter
outputs 10,000Hz at 10,000 gpm.
Note
Changes to pulse width are only required when there is a minimum pulse width required for
external counters, relays, etc.
Example
The external counter is ranged for 350 gpm and pulse is set for one gallon. Assuming the pulse
width is 0.5 ms, the maximum frequency output is 5.833Hz.
Advanced Configuration Functionality
73
Reference Manual
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Pulse mode
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Pulse, Pulse Mode
Modbus register
85
The pulse mode configures the frequency output of the pulse. It can be set to either 50% duty
cycle, or fixed. There are two options that pulse mode can be configured as follows:
Register value
Mode
0
Pulse Output: User defines a fixed pulse width (default)
1
Frequency Output: Pulse width automatically set to 50% duty cycle
To use pulse width settings, pulse mode must be set to pulse output.
5.2.3
Totalizers
The totalizer provides the total amount of fluid that has passed through the meter. There are
three totalizers available. They can be independently configured for one of the following
options:

Net total—Increments with forward flow and decrements with reverse flow (reverse flow
must be enabled). Can be reset to zero using the net total reset function.

Forward total—Will only increment with forward flow.

Reverse total—Will only increment with reverse flow if reverse flow is enabled. To enable
reverse flow, see page 88.
All totalizer values will be reset if line size is changed. This will happen even if the totalizer reset
control is set to non-resettable.
The totalizers have the capability to increment the total to a maximum value of 50 feet per
second of flow (or the volumetric equivalent) for a period of 20 years before roll-over occurs.
LOI menu path
Totalizers
The value of the totalizers can be viewed by accessing the totalizers menu option through the
LOI by pressing the DOWN arrow on the display. This will open the LOI menu structure allowing
access to the totalizers selection.
74
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
View Totals
Totalizer A: Totalizers, View Total A
LOI menu path
Totalizer B: Totalizers, View Total B
Totalizer C: Totalizers, View Total C
Modbus registers
Totalizer A: 203-204; Totalizer B: 205-206; Totalizer C: 207-208
Displays the current value for each totalizer and shows the totalizer incrementing/decrementing based on totalizer configuration and flow direction.
To pause the totalizer, press the DOWN arrow to display the totalizer screen and press the
RIGHT arrow to pause the totalizer. This will hold the current totalizer values on the screen for
reading or recording. The totalizer will continue to run even though the values are not
changing. To unpause the totalizer, press the RIGHT arrow again. The totalizer value will
instantly increment to the correct value and continuing running.
Configure totalizers
LOI menu path
Totalizers, Config/Control
Start, stop, and reset all totalizers, configure the independent totalizers, and security controls
for write protecting and resetting the totalizers.
Totalizer function
LOI menu path
Modbus coil Modbus coil value
Start All Totalizers
View Totals, Config Total, Start All
101
1
Stop All Totalizers
View Totals, Config Total, Stop All
101
0
Reset All Totalizers
View Totals, Config Total, Reset All
103
1
Note
If an individual totalizer is configured as non-resettable, the global totalizer reset command will
not affect that totalizer.
Note
If an individual totalizer is configured as write protected, the global totalizer start/stop/reset
commands will not affect that totalizer.
Totalizer controls
Totalizer A: Totalizers, Config/Control, Total A
LOI menu path
Totalizer B: Totalizers, Config/Control, Total B
Totalizer C: Totalizers, Config/Control, Total C
Reset the individual totalizer values and configure the totalizer direction, units, and reset
control.
When writing to the Modbus registers, the following values should be used:
Advanced Configuration Functionality
75
Reference Manual
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Direction
Totalizer A: Totalizers, Config/Control, Total A, Total A Config, Direction
LOI menu path
Totalizer B: Totalizers, Config/Control, Total B, Total B Config, Direction
Totalizer C: Totalizers, Config/Control, Total C, Total C Config, Direction
Modbus register
Totalizer A: 101; Totalizer B: 103; Totalizer C: 105
Configure the direction for the totalizers as either Net, Forward, or Reverse.
Register value
Totalizer direction
0
Net (default for Total A)
1
Forward (default for Total B)
2
Reverse (default for Total C)
Units
Totalizer A: Totalizers, Config/Control, Total A, Total A Config, Units
LOI menu path
Totalizer B: Totalizers, Config/Control, Total B, Total B Config, Units
Totalizer C: Totalizers, Config/Control, Total C, Total C Config, Units
Modbus Register
Totalizer A: 62; Totalizer B: 63; Totalizer C: 64
Configure the units for totalizers.
Volume units
Mass units
Register value
Units
Register value
Units
40
Gallons
61
Kilograms
41
Liters
62
Metric tons
42
Imperial Gallons
63
Pounds
43
Cubic Meters
64
Short tons
46
Barrels (42 Gallons)
112
Cubic Feet
Register value
Units
246
Cubic Centimeters
44
Feet (default)
247
Barrels (31 Gallons)
45
Meters
253
Special Units(1)
Other units
(1) See Section 5: Configure special units for details.
Reset configuration
Totalizer A: Totalizers, Config/Control, Total A, Total A Config, Reset Config
LOI menu path
Totalizer B: Totalizers, Config/Control, Total B, Total B Config, Reset Config
Totalizer C: Totalizers, Config/Control, Total C, Total C Config, Reset Config
Modbus register
Totalizer A: 100; Totalizer B: 102; Totalizer C: 104
Configure if the totalizer is non-resettable, or if it can be reset through the reset commands.
Register value Reset options
76
0
Not Resettable (default for Totalizer B & C)
1
Resettable (default for Totalizer A)
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Reset individual totalizer
Totalizer A: Totalizers, Config/Control, Total A, Reset Total A
LOI menu path
Totalizer B: Totalizers, Config/Control, Total B, Reset Total B
Totalizer C: Totalizers, Config/Control, Total C, Reset Total C
Modbus coil
Totalizer A: 104; Totalizer B: 105; Totalizer C: 106
Independently reset the totalizers. This requires the reset option to be configured as resettable.
Writing a value of “1” to the coil will reset the totalizer value if it has been configured as
resettable through Modbus communication. See reset options for information on configuring
the totalizer reset options.
Modbus coil value
Reset mode
0
Run
1
Reset
Reset all totalizers
LOI menu path
Totalizers, Config/Control, Reset All
Modbus coil
103
This global command will reset totalizer values to zero for all totalizers that have been
configured as resettable.
Modbus coil value
Reset mode
0
Run
1
Reset
Totalizer security
LOI menu path
Totalizers, Config/Control, Security
Configure totalizer security capabilities for the Local Operator Interface and write protection.
LOI control
LOI menu path
Totalizers, Config/Control, Security, LOI Control
Configure the ability to start, stop, and reset the totalizers through the LOI.
Advanced Configuration Functionality
77
Reference Manual
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
LOI totalizer start/stop
LOI menu path
Totalizers, Config/Control, Security, LOI Control, LOI Start/Stop
Modbus coil
141
Enable/disable the ability to start or stop totalizers through the LOI.
Modbus coil value Operating mode
0
Prevent totalizer start/stop through the LOI
1
Allow totalizer start/stop through the LOI (default)
LOI Totalizer reset
LOI menu path
Totalizers, Config/Control, Security, LOI Control, LOI Reset
Modbus coil
142
Configure the ability to reset the totalizers through the LOI.
Modbus coil value
Operating mode
0
Prevent totalizer reset through the LOI
1
Allow totalizer reset through the LOI (default)
Totalizer write protection
LOI menu path
Totalizers, Config/Control, Security, Write Protect, WP Start/Stop
In addition to controlling the LOI capability to start/stop and reset the totalizers, specific write
protect functionality can also be configured adding an additional level of security to the
totalizers.
Start/stop write protect
LOI menu path
Totalizers, Config/Control, Security, Write Protect
Modbus coil
139
Configure write protection on the ability to start or stop the totalizers. This is a global command
and applies to all totalizers.
Modbus coil value Operating mode
78
0
Disable totalizer start/stop write protect (default)
1
Enable totalizer start/stop write protect
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Reset write protect
LOI menu path
Totalizers, Config/Control, Security, Write Protect, WP Reset
Modbus coil
140
Configure write protection on the ability to reset the totalizers. This is a global command and
applies to all totalizers.
Modbus coil value Operating mode
5.2.4
0
Disable totalizer reset write protect (default)
1
Enable totalizer reset write protect
Discrete input/output
This configuration option is only available if the auxiliary output suite (option code AX) was
ordered. The auxiliary output suite provides two channels for control. The discrete input can
provide positive zero return (PZR) and net totalizer reset. The discrete output control function
can be configured to drive an external signal to indicate zero flow, reverse flow, empty pipe,
diagnostic status, flow limit, or transmitter status. A complete list and description of the
available auxiliary functions is provided below.
Digital input options (channel 1 only)

PZR (Positive Zero Return). When conditions are met to activate the input, the
transmitter will force the output to zero flow.

Totalizer Reset - Configure the digital input to reset Totalizer A, Totalizer B, Totalizer C,
or all totalizers when conditions are met to activate the input.
Digital output options

Reverse Flow—The output will activate when the transmitter detects a reverse flow
condition.

Zero Flow—The output will activate when a no flow condition is detected.

Transmitter Fault—The output will activate when a transmitter fault condition is
detected.

Empty Pipe—The output will activate when the transmitter detects an empty pipe
condition.

Flow Limit—The output will activate when the transmitter measures a flow rate that
meets the conditions established for the flow limit 1 alert.

Flow Limit 2—The output will activate when the transmitter measures a flow rate that
meets the conditions established for the flow limit 2 alert.

Diagnostic Status Alert—The output will activate when the transmitter detects a
condition that meets the configured criteria of the diagnostic status alert.

Total Limit—The output will activate when the total A value meets the conditions
established for the total limit alert.
Channel 1
Channel 1 can be configured as either a discrete input (DI) or as a discrete output (DO).
Advanced Configuration Functionality
79
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
DI/O 1 control
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, DI/O 1, DI/O 1 Control
Modbus register
91
This parameter configures the auxiliary output channel 1. It controls whether channel 1 will be a
discrete input or discrete output on terminals 5(-) and 6(+). Note that the transmitter must have
been ordered with the auxiliary output suite (option code AX) to have access to this
functionality.
Register value
Operating mode
1
Input (default)
2
Output
251
Not available
Discrete input 1
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, DI/O 1, DI 1
Modbus register
92
This parameter displays the configuration for channel 1 when used as a discrete input. Refer to
the list above for available discrete input configurations.
Register value
Configuration
0
PZR (default)
1
Totalizer A Reset
2
Totalizer B Reset
3
Totalizer C Reset
251
Not available
Discrete output 1
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, DI/O 1, DO 1
Modbus register
93
This parameter displays the configuration for channel 1 when used as a discrete output. Refer to
the following list for available discrete output configurations.
Register value
0
Reverse flow
1
Zero flow (default)
2
Transmitter fault
3
Empty pipe
4
Flow limit 1
5
Flow limit 2
6
Diagnostic status alert
7
Totalizer limit 1
251
80
Configuration
Reset all
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Channel 2
Channel 2 is available as discrete output only.
Discrete output 2
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, DO 2
Modbus register
96
This parameter displays the configuration for channel 2. Refer to the following list for available
discrete output functions.
Register value
Configuration
0
Reverse flow
1
Zero flow (default)
2
Transmitter fault
3
Empty pipe
4
Flow limit 1
5
Flow limit 2
6
Diagnostic status alert
7
251
Totalizer limit 1
Not available
Flow limit (1 and 2)
LOI menu path
Flow 1: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 1
Flow 2: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 2
There are two configurable flow limits. Configure the parameters that will determine the criteria
for activation of a diagnostic alert if the measured flow rate falls within a set of configured
criteria. This functionality can be used for operating simple batching operations or generating
alerts when certain flow conditions are met. This parameter can be configured as a discrete
output if the transmitter was ordered with the auxiliary output suite (option code AX) and the
outputs are enabled. If a discrete output is configured for flow limit, the discrete output will
activate when the conditions defined under mode configuration are met. See “Mode” on
page 82 below.
Advanced Configuration Functionality
81
Reference Manual
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Control
LOI menu path
Modbus coil
Flow 1: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 1, Control 1
Flow 2: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 2, Control 2
Flow limit 1: 97
Flow limit 2: 98
This parameter turns the flow limit diagnostic alert ON or OFF.
ON - The transmitter will generate a diagnostic alert when the defined conditions are met. If a
discrete output is configured for flow limit, the discrete output will activate when the conditions
for mode are met.
OFF - The transmitter will not generate an alert for the flow limit.
Modbus coil value
Configuration
0
OFF (default)
1
ON
Mode
LOI menu path
Modbus register
Flow 1: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 1, Mode 1
Flow 2: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 2, Mode 2
Flow limit 1: 97
Flow limit 2: 98
The mode parameter sets the conditions under which the flow limit alert will activate. High and
low limits exist for each channel and can be configured independently.
Register value
Configuration
0
High limit—The alert will activate when the measured flow rate exceeds the high
limit set point (default).
1
Low limit—The alert will activate when the measured flow rate falls below the
low limit set point.
2
In range—The alert will activate when the measured flow rate is between the
high limit and low limit set points.
3
Out of range—The alert will activate when the measured flow rate exceeds the
high limit set point or falls below the low limit set point.
High limit
LOI menu path
Modbus register
Flow 1: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 1, High Limit 1
Flow 2: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 2, High Limit 2
Flow limit 1: 337–338
Flow limit 2: 341–342
Set the flow rate value that corresponds to the high limit set point for the flow limit alert.
82
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Low limit
LOI menu path
Modbus register
Flow 1: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 1, Low Limit 1
Flow 2: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 2, Low Limit 2
Flow limit 1: 339–340
Flow limit 2: 343–344
Set the flow rate value that corresponds to the low limit set point for the flow limit alert.
Flow limit hysteresis
LOI menu path
Modbus register
Flow 1: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 1, Hysteresis
Flow 2: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 2, Hysteresis
345–346
Set the hysteresis band for the flow limit to determine how quickly the transmitter comes out of
alert status. The hysteresis value is used for both flow limit 1 and flow limit 2. Changing this
parameter under the configuration parameters for one channel will cause it to also change in the
other channel.
Total limit
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Totalizer, Total Limit
Configure the parameters that will determine the criteria for activating a diagnostic alert if the
measured totalizer A falls within a set of configured criteria. This functionality can be used for
operating simple batching operations or generating alerts when certain localized values are
met. This parameter can be configured as a discrete output if the transmitter was ordered with
auxiliary outputs enabled (option code AX). If a digital output is configured for total limit, the
digital output will activate when the conditions for total mode are met.
Total control
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Totalizer, Total Limit, Total Control
Modbus coil
107
This parameter turns the total limit diagnostic alert ON or OFF.
Modbus coil value Configuration
0
OFF—The transmitter will not generate an alert for the total limit (default).
1
ON—The transmitter will generate a diagnostic alert when the defined
conditions are met.
Advanced Configuration Functionality
83
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Total mode
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Totalizer, Total Limit, Total Mode
Modbus register
99
The total mode parameter sets the conditions under which the total limit diagnostic alert will
activate. High and low limits exist for each channel and can be configured independently.
Register value
Configuration
0
High limit - The alert will activate when the totalizer A value exceeds the high
limit set point (default).
1
Low limit - The alert will activate when the totalizer A value falls below the low
limit set point.
2
In range - The alert will activate when the totalizer A value is between the high
limit and low limit set points.
3
Out of range - The alert will activate when the totalizer A value exceeds the high
limit set point or falls below the low limit set point.
Total high limit
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Totalizer, Total Limit, Tot Hi Limit
Modbus register
347–348
Set the totalizer A value that corresponds to the high limit set point for the total high limit alert.
Total low limit
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Totalizer, Total Limit, Tot Low Limit
Modbus register
349–350
Set the totalizer A value that corresponds to the low limit set point for the total low limit alert.
Total limit hysteresis
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Totalizer, Total Limit, Hysteresis
Modbus register
351–352
Set the hysteresis band for the total limit to determine how quickly the transmitter comes out of
alert status.
84
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Diagnostic status alert
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Totalizer, Diagnostic Status Alert
The diagnostic status alert is used to turn on or off the diagnostics that will cause the digital
output to activate when configured for diagnostic status alert.
Modbus coil
126
Electronics Failure
127
Coil Open Circuit
128
Empty Pipe
129
Reverse Flow
130
Ground/Wiring Fault
131
High Process Noise
132
Electronics Temperature Out of Range
133
Electrode Coat Limit 1
134
Electrode Coat Limit 2
135
Continuous Meter Verification
136
Coil Over Current
137
Sensor Electrode Saturated
138
Coil Power Limit
Modbus coil value
5.2.5
Diagnostic
Diagnostic
0
OFF—The diagnostic status alert will not activate when diagnostics designated
as OFF are detected (default).
1
ON—The diagnostic status alert will activate when a transmitter detects a
diagnostic designated as ON.
Configure LOI
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, LOI Config
The LOI configuration contains functionality to configure the display of the transmitter.
Flow display
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, LOI Config, Flow Display
Modbus register
81
Use flow display to configure the parameters that will appear on the LOI flowrate screen. The
flowrate screen displays two lines of information. Choose one of the following options:
Register value
Display
0
Flowrate and Total A (default)
1
Flowrate and Total B
2
Flowrate and Total C
Advanced Configuration Functionality
85
Reference Manual
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Language
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, LOI Config, Language
Modbus register
83
Use language to configure the display language shown on the LOI. Choose one of the following
options:
Register value
Language
0
English (default)
1
Spanish
2
German
3
French
4
Portuguese
Display auto lock
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, LOI Config, Disp Auto Lock
Modbus register
119
Use display auto lock to configure the LOI to automatically lock the LOI after a set period of time
of no keypad activity. Choose one of the following options:
Register value
Auto lock
0
OFF (default)
1
1 Minute
2
10 Minutes
LOI backlight control
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, LOI Config, Backlight
Modbus register
122
To conserve power, the LOI backlight can be configured to automatically turn off after a set
amount of time without keypad activity. Configure the timeout control for the LOI backlight
using the following options:
Register value
0
1
2
3
4
86
Backlight control
Always OFF (default for low power)
10 Seconds
20 Seconds
30 Seconds
Always ON (default)
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
LOI display lock
The 8732EM Transmitter has display lock functionality to prevent unintentional configuration
changes. The display can be locked manually or configured to automatically lock after a set
period of time. The display is always locked on the flow screen
Modbus coil
100
Turn ON/OFF the LOI display lock.
Modbus coil value Operating mode
5.3
0
LOI display lock is turned OFF (default)
1
LOI display lock is turned ON
Additional parameters
The following parameters may be required for detailed configuration settings based on your
application.
5.3.1
Coil drive frequency
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, More Params, Coil Frequency
Modbus register
77
Use coil drive frequency to change the pulse rate of the coils. Choose one of the following options:
Register value
Frequency
0
5 Hz—The standard coil drive frequency is 5 Hz, which is sufficient for nearly all
applications (default).
1
37 Hz—If the process fluid causes a noisy or unstable output, increase the coil
drive frequency to 37.5 Hz. If the 37 Hz mode is selected, perform the auto zero
function for optimum performance.
See “Auto zero” on page 119.
Advanced Configuration Functionality
87
Reference Manual
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
5.3.2
Process density
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, More Params, Proc Density
Density Units: 29
Modbus register
Density Value: 333–334
Use the process density value to convert from a volumetric flow rate to a mass flow rate using the
following equation:
Qm = Qv x p
Where:
Qm is the mass flow rate
Qv is the volumetric flow rate, and
p is the fluid density
Register value
5.3.3
Units
92
Pounds per cubic foot (lb/ft3)
94
Kilograms per cubic meter (kg/m3)
Reverse flow
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Reverse Flow
Modbus coil
99
Use reverse flow to enable or disable the transmitter's ability to read flow in the opposite
direction of the flow direction arrow (see Figure 2-4 on page 10). This may occur when the
process has bi-directional flow, or when either the electrode wires or the coil wires are reversed
(see Troubleshooting 9.3.3: Remote wiring). This also enables the totalizers to count in the
reverse direction.
Modbus coil value
5.3.4
Operating mode
0
Reverse flow disabled (default)
1
Reverse flow enabled
Low flow cutoff
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Sig Processing, Low Flow Cutoff
Modbus register
325–326
Low flow cutoff allows the user to set a low flow limit to be specified. The flow reading is driven to
zero for flow rates below the set point. The low flow cutoff units are the same as the PV units and
cannot be changed. The low flow cutoff value applies to both forward and reverse flows.
88
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
5.3.5
August 2015
Flow damping
LOI menu path
Basic Setup, Damping
Modbus register
321
Flow damping allows selection of a response time, in seconds, to a step change in flow rate. It is
most often used to smooth fluctuations in output.
5.3.6
Signal processing
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Sig Processing
The 8732EM contains several advanced functions that can be used to stabilize erratic outputs
caused by process noise. The signal processing menu contains this functionality.
If the 37 Hz coil drive mode has been set, and the output is still unstable, the damping and signal
processing function should be used. It is important to set the coil drive mode to 37 Hz first, so
the loop response time is not increased.
The 8732EM provides for a very easy and straightforward start-up, and also incorporates the
capability to deal with difficult applications that have previously manifested themselves in a
noisy output signal. In addition to selecting a higher coil drive frequency (37 Hz vs. 5 Hz) to
isolate the flow signal from the process noise, the 8732EM microprocessor can actually
scrutinize each input based on three user-defined parameters to reject the noise specific to the
application.
See Section 7 for the detailed description of how the signal processing works.
Advanced Configuration Functionality
89
Reference Manual
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
5.4
Configure special units
Special units are used when the application requires units that are not included in the flow units
available from the device. Refer to Flow units (Register 61) in Section 2 for a complete list of the
available units.
5.4.1
Base unit
LOI menu path
Basic Setup, Flow Units, Special Units, Base Vol Units
Modbus register
76
Base unit is the unit from which the conversion is being made. Set this variable to the appropriate
option.
Volume units
5.4.2
Mass units
Register value
Units
Register value
Units
40
Gallons (default)
61
Kilograms
41
Liters
62
Metric tons
42
Imperial Gallons
63
Pounds
43
Cubic Meters
64
Short tons
46
Barrels (42 Gallons)
112
Cubic Feet
Register value
246
Cubic Centimeters
44
Feet
247
Barrels (31 Gallons)
45
Meters
Other units
Units
Conversion factor
LOI menu path
Basic Setup, Flow Units, Special Units, Conv Factor
Modbus register
323–324
The special units conversion factor is used to convert base units to special units. For a straight
conversion of units from one unit of measure to a different unit of measure, the conversion factor
is the number of base units in the new unit.
For example, if you are converting from gallons to barrels and there are 31 gallons in a barrel,
the conversion factor is 31.
90
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
5.4.3
August 2015
Base time unit
LOI menu path
Basic Setup, Flow Units, Special Units, Base Time Unit
Modbus register
75
Base time unit provides the time unit from which to calculate the special units. For example, if
your special units is a volume per minute, select minutes.
Register Value
50
5.4.4
Units
Minute (default)
51
Second
52
Hour
53
Day
Special volume unit
LOI menu path
Basic Setup, Flow Units, Special Units, Volume Unit
Modbus register
411–412
Special volume unit enables you to display the volume unit format to which you have converted
the base volume units. For example, if the special units are abc/min, the special volume variable
is abc. The volume units variable is also used in totalizing the special units flow.
5.4.5
Special flow rate unit
LOI menu path
Basic Setup, Flow Units, Special Units, Rate Unit
Modbus register
409–410
Flow rate unit is a format variable that provides a record of the units to which you are converting.
The Handheld Communicator will display a special units designator as the units format for your
primary variable. The actual special units setting you define will not appear. Four characters are
available to store the new units designation. The 8732EM LOI will display the four character
designation as configured.
Example
To display flow in acre-feet per day, and acre-foot is equal to 43560 cubic feet, the procedure
would be:
1.
Set the volume unit to ACFT.
2.
Set the base volume unit to ft3.
3.
Set the conversion factor to 43560.
4.
Set the time base unit to Day.
5.
Set the flow rate unit to AF/D.
Advanced Configuration Functionality
91
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
92
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Section 6
Advanced Diagnostics
Configuration
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Licensing and enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tunable empty pipe detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronics temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ground/wiring fault detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High process noise detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coated electrode detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMART™ Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run manual SMART Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Continuous SMART Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMART Meter Verification test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMART Meter Verification measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimizing the SMART Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Calibration Verification Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1
page 93
page 95
page 96
page 98
page 99
page 100
page 101
page 103
page 107
page 109
page 110
page 111
page 113
page 115
Introduction
Rosemount Magnetic Flowmeters provide device diagnostics that detect and warn of abnormal
situations throughout the life of the meter—from Installation to Maintenance and Meter
Verification. With Rosemount Magnetic Flowmeter diagnostics enabled, plant availability and
throughput can be improved, and costs through simplified installation, maintenance and troubleshooting can be reduced.
Table 6-1. Diagnostics Availability
Diagnostic name
Diagnostic category
Product capability
Modbus Status
Communication
Standard
Listen Only Mode
Communication
Standard
Restart Modbus Communication
Communication
Standard
Reset Modbus Configuration
Communication
Standard
Tunable Empty Pipe
Process
Standard
Electronics Temperature
Maintenance
Standard
Coil Fault
Maintenance
Standard
Transmitter Fault
Maintenance
Standard
Reverse Flow
Process
Standard
Electrode Saturation
Process
Standard
Modbus Communication Diagnostics
Basic Diagnostics
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
93
Reference Manual
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table 6-1. Diagnostics Availability (continued)
Diagnostic name
Diagnostic category
Product capability
Coil Current
Maintenance
Standard
Coil Power
Maintenance
Standard
High Process Noise
Process
Suite 1 (DA1)
Grounding and Wiring Fault
Installation
Suite 1 (DA1)
Coated Electrode Detection
Process
Suite 1 (DA1)
Commanded Meter Verification
Meter Health
Suite 2 (DA2)
Continuous Meter Verification
Meter Health
Suite 2 (DA2)
Advanced Diagnostics
Options for accessing Rosemount Magmeter Diagnostics
Rosemount Magmeter Diagnostics can be accessed through the Local Operator Interface (LOI),
ProLink III v.3.0 software, or any other Modbus communication tool.
Access diagnostics through the LOI for quicker installation, maintenance,
and meter verification
Rosemount Magmeter Diagnostics are available through the LOI to make maintenance of every
magmeter easier.
Access diagnostics through ProLink III v.3.0
The value of the Diagnostics increases significantly when ProLink III is used. The user will see
simplified screen flow and procedures on how to respond to the diagnostics messages.
6.2
Modbus Communication Diagnostics
Modbus Status
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Modbus Diag, Modbus Status
Displays the status of the Modbus communication. There are three possible status modes:
94

Active–The transmitter is communicating with the host with no errors.

Inactive–The transmitter is not communicating with the host.

Communication Mismatch–The transmitter is communicating with the host, but the
configuration parameters between the transmitter and the host do not match,
resulting in incorrect parsing of the Modbus data.
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Listen Only Mode
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Modbus Diag, Listen Only MD
The transmitter has been placed into listen only mode through either the host system or LOI.
The transmitter is not actively sending Modbus data, but is receiving commands from the host
system.
Restart Modbus Communication
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Modbus Diag, Restart MB Com
This function is only available through the LOI. This function can be used to perform a soft reset
of the Modbus communication.
Reset Modbus Configuration
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Modbus Diag, Reset MB Confg
This function is only available through the LOI. This will initiate a method to reset all Modbus
communication parameters back to the factory default. Activating this method will result in a
series of screens that describe what the default parameters are, and then allow the user to
proceed with the reset or cancel the method. Default configuration parameters are shown in
the following table.
6.3
Parameter
Default value
Address
1
Floating Point Byte Order
0-1-2-3
Baud Rate
19,200
Parity
Even
Stop Bits
1
Minimum Response Delay
10 ms
Licensing and enabling
All advanced diagnostics are licensed by ordering option code DA1, DA2, or both. In the event
that a diagnostic option is not ordered, advanced diagnostics can be licensed in the field
through the use of a license key. Each transmitter has a unique license key specific to the
diagnostic option code. A trial license is also available to enable the advanced diagnostics. This
temporary functionality will be automatically disabled after 30-days or when power to the
transmitter is cycled, whichever occurs first. This trial code can be used a maximum of three
times per transmitter. See the detailed procedures below for entering the license key and
enabling the advanced diagnostics. To obtain a permanent or trial license key, contact your local
Rosemount representative.
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
95
Reference Manual
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
6.3.1
Licensing the 8732EM diagnostics
For licensing the advanced diagnostics, follow the steps below.
1.
Power-up the 8732EM Transmitter.
2.
Determine the Device ID
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Device Info, Device ID
Modbus register
151–152
3.
Obtain a License Key from the local Rosemount representative.
4.
Enter License Key.
LOI menu path
Modbus register
5.
6.4
Diagnostics, Advanced Diagnostics, Licensing, License Key, License Key
157–158
Enable Diagnostics.
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Diag Controls
Modbus coil
117–124
Tunable empty pipe detection
The tunable empty pipe detection provides a means of minimizing issues and false readings when
the pipe is empty. This is most important in batching applications where the pipe may run
empty with some regularity. If the pipe is empty, this diagnostic will activate, set the flow rate to
0, and deliver an alert.
Turning empty pipe on/off
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Diag Controls, Empty Pipe
Modbus coil
117
The tunable empty pipe detection diagnostic can be turned on or off as required by the
application.
Modbus coil value
6.4.1
Diagnostic mode
0
Empty pipe diagnostic is OFF.
1
Empty pipe diagnostic is ON (default)
Tunable empty pipe parameters
The tunable empty pipe diagnostic has one read-only parameter, and two parameters that can be
custom configured to optimize the diagnostic performance.
96
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Empty pipe (EP) value
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Variables, Empty Pipe
Modbus register
219–220
This parameter shows the current empty pipe value. This is a read-only value. This number is a
unit-less number and is calculated based on multiple installation and process variables such as
sensor type, line size, process fluid properties, and wiring. If the empty pipe value exceeds the
empty pipe trigger level for a specified number of updates, then the empty pipe diagnostic alert
will activate.
Empty pipe (EP) trigger level
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Basic Diagnostics, Empty Pipe, EP Trig Level
Modbus register
335–336
Limits: 3 to 2000
Empty pipe trigger level is the threshold limit that the empty pipe value must exceed before the
empty pipe diagnostic alert activates. The default setting from the factory is 100.
Empty pipe (EP) counts
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Basic Diagnostics, Empty Pipe, EP Counts
Modbus register
86
Limits: 2 to 50
Empty pipe counts is the number of consecutive updates that the transmitter must receive where
the empty pipe value exceeds the empty pipe trigger level before the empty pipe diagnostic
alert activates. The default setting from the factory is 5.
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
97
Reference Manual
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
6.4.2
Optimizing tunable empty pipe
The tunable empty pipe diagnostic is set at the factory to properly diagnose most applications. If
this diagnostic activates, the following procedure can be followed to optimize the empty pipe
diagnostic for the application.
Example
1.
Record the empty pipe value with a full pipe condition.
Example: Full reading = 0.2
2.
Record the empty pipe value with an empty pipe condition.
Example: Empty reading = 80.0
3.
Set the empty pipe trigger level to a value between the full and empty readings. For
increased sensitivity to empty pipe conditions, set the trigger level to a value closer to
the full pipe value.
Example: Set the trigger level to 25.0
4.
Set the empty pipe counts to a value corresponding to the desired sensitivity level for the
diagnostic. For applications with entrained air or potential air slugs, less sensitivity may
be desired.
Example: Set the counts to 10
6.5
Electronics temperature
The 8732EM continuously monitors the temperature of the internal electronics. If the measured
electronics temperature exceeds the operating limits of –40 to 140 °F (–40 to 60 °C) the
transmitter will go into alarm and generate an alert.
6.5.1
Turning electronics temperature on/off
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Diag Controls, Elect Temp
Modbus coil
120
The electronics temperature diagnostic can be turned on or off as required by the application.
Modbus coil value
6.5.2
Diagnostic mode
0
Electronics temperature diagnostic is OFF.
1
Electronics temperature diagnostic is ON (default)
Electronics temperature parameters
The electronics temperature diagnostic has one read-only parameter. It does not have any
configurable parameters.
98
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Electronics temperature
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Variables, Elect Temp
Modbus register
209–210
This parameter shows the current temperature of the electronics. This is a read-only value.
6.6
Ground/wiring fault detection
The transmitter continuously monitors signal amplitudes over a wide range of frequencies. For
the ground/wiring fault detection diagnostic, the transmitter specifically looks at the signal
amplitude at frequencies of 50 Hz and 60 Hz which are the common AC power frequencies
found throughout the world. If the amplitude of the signal at either of these frequencies
exceeds 5 mV, that is an indication that there is a ground or wiring issue and that stray electrical
signals are getting into the transmitter. The diagnostic alert will activate indicating that the
ground and wiring of the installation should be carefully reviewed.
The ground/wiring fault detection diagnostic provides a means of verifying installations are done
correctly. If the installation is not wired or grounded properly, this diagnostic will activate and
deliver an alert. This diagnostic can also detect if the grounding is lost over-time due to
corrosion or another root cause.
6.6.1
Turning ground/wiring fault on/off
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Diag Controls, Ground/Wiring
Modbus coil
119
The ground/wiring fault detection diagnostic can be turned on or off as required by the
application. If the advanced diagnostics suite 1 (DA1 Option) was ordered, then the
ground/wiring fault detection diagnostic will be turned on. If DA1 was not ordered or licensed,
this diagnostic is not available.
Modbus coil value
6.6.2
Diagnostic mode
0
Grounding and wiring diagnostic is OFF.
1
Grounding and wiring diagnostic is ON.
Ground/wiring fault parameters
The ground/wiring fault detection diagnostic has one read-only parameter. It does not have any
configurable parameters.
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
99
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Line noise
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Variables, Line Noise
Modbus register
211–212
The line noise parameter shows the amplitude of the line noise. This is a read-only value. This
number is a measure of the signal strength at 50/60 Hz. If the line noise value exceeds 5 mV, then
the ground/wiring fault diagnostic alert will activate.
6.7
High process noise detection
The high process noise diagnostic detects if there is a process condition causing an unstable or
noisy reading that is not an actual flow variation. A common cause of high process noise is slurry
flow, like pulp stock or mining slurries. Other conditions that cause this diagnostic to activate
are high levels of chemical reaction or entrained gas in the liquid. If unusual noise or flow
variation is seen, this diagnostic will activate and deliver an alert. If this situation exists and is left
without remedy, it will add additional uncertainty and noise to the flow reading.
6.7.1
Turning high process noise on/off
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Diag Controls, Process Noise
Modbus coil
118
The high process noise diagnostic can be turned on or off as required by the application. If the
advanced diagnostics suite 1 (DA1 Option) was ordered, then the high process noise diagnostic
will be turned on. If DA1 was not ordered or licensed, this diagnostic is not available.
Modbus coil value
6.7.2
Diagnostic mode
0
High process noise diagnostic is OFF.
1
High process noise diagnostic is ON.
High process noise parameters
The high process noise diagnostic has two read-only parameters. It does not have any
configurable parameters. This diagnostic requires that flow be present in the pipe and the
velocity be greater than1 ft/s (0.3 m/s).
5 Hz signal to noise ratio (SNR)
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Variables, 5Hz SNR
Modbus register
213–214
This parameter shows the value of the signal to noise ratio at the coil drive frequency of 5 Hz.
This is a read-only value. This number is a measure of the signal strength at 5 Hz relative to the
amount of process noise. If the transmitter is operating in 5 Hz mode, and the signal to noise
ratio remains below 25 for one minute, then the high process noise diagnostic alert will activate.
100
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
37 Hz signal to noise ratio (SNR)
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Variables, 37Hz SNR
Modbus register
215–216
This parameter shows the current value of the signal to noise ratio at the coil drive frequency of
37 Hz. This is a read-only value. This number is a measure of the signal strength at 37 Hz relative
to the amount of process noise. If the transmitter is operating in 37 Hz mode, and the signal to
noise ratio remains below 25 for one minute, then the high process noise diagnostic alert will
activate.
6.8
Coated electrode detection
The coated electrode detection diagnostic provides a means of monitoring insulating coating
buildup on the measurement electrodes. If coating is not removed, buildup over time can lead
to a compromised flow measurement. This diagnostic can detect if the electrode is coated and if
the amount of coating is affecting the flow measurement. There are two levels of electrode
coating.
Limit 1 indicates when coating is starting to occur, but has not compromised the flow
measurement.
Limit 2 indicates when coating is affecting the flow measurement and the meter should be
serviced immediately.
6.8.1
Turning coated electrode detection on/off
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Diag Controls, Elec Coating
Modbus coil
121
The coated electrode detection diagnostic can be turned on or off as required by the application.
If the advanced diagnostics suite 1 (DA1 option) was ordered, then the coated electrode detection
diagnostic will be turned on. If DA1 was not ordered or licensed, this diagnostic is not available.
Modbus coil value
6.8.2
Diagnostic mode
0
Electrode coating diagnostic is turned OFF.
1
Electrode coating diagnostic is turned ON.
Coated electrode parameters
The coated electrode detection diagnostic has four parameters. Two are read-only and two are
configurable parameters. The electrode coating parameters need to be initially monitored to
accurately set the electrode coating limit levels for each application.
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
101
Reference Manual
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Electrode coating (EC) value
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Elec Coating, EC Current Val
Modbus register
221–222
The electrode coating value reads the value of the coated electrode detection diagnostic.
Electrode coating (EC) level 1 limit
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Elec Coat, EC Limit 1
Modbus register
353–354
Set the criteria for the electrode coating limit 1 which indicates when coating is starting to occur,
but has not compromised the flow measurement. The default value for this parameter is 1000
kohm.
Electrode coating (EC) level 2 limit
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Elec Coat, EC Limit 2
Modbus register
355–356
Set the criteria for the electrode coating limit 2 which indicates when coating is affecting the flow
measurement and the meter should be serviced immediately. The default value for this
parameter is 2000 kohm.
Maximum electrode coating (EC)
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Elec Coat, EC Max Value
Modbus register
281–282
The maximum electrode coating value reads the maximum value of the coated electrode detection
diagnostic since the last maximum value reset.
Clear maximum electrode coating value
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Elec Coat, Reset Max Val
Modbus coil
115
Use this method to reset the maximum electrode coating value to zero.
Modbus coil value
102
Operation
0
Monitor maximum electrode coating value.
1
Reset maximum electrode coating value.
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
6.9
August 2015
SMART™ Meter Verification
The SMART Meter Verification diagnostic provides a means of verifying the flowmeter is within
calibration without removing the sensor from the process. This diagnostic test provides a review
of the transmitter and sensor's critical parameters as a means to document verification of
calibration. The results of this diagnostic provide the deviation amount from expected values
and a pass/fail summary against user-defined criteria for the application and conditions. The
SMART Meter Verification diagnostic can be configured to run continuously in the background
during normal operation, or it can be manually initiated as required by the application.
6.9.1
Sensor baseline (signature) parameters
The SMART Meter Verification diagnostic functions by taking a baseline sensor signature and
then comparing measurements taken during the verification test to these baseline results.
The sensor signature describes the magnetic behavior of the sensor. Based on Faraday's law, the
induced voltage measured on the electrodes is proportional to the magnetic field strength.
Thus, any changes in the magnetic field will result in a calibration shift of the sensor. Having the
transmitter take an initial sensor signature when first installed will provide the baseline for the
verification tests that are done in the future. There are three specific measurements that are
stored in the transmitter's non-volatile memory that are used when performing the calibration
verification.
Coil circuit resistance
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Sensr Baseline, Values, Coil Resist
Modbus register
287–288
The coil circuit resistance is an indication of the coil circuit health. This value is used as a baseline
to determine if the coil circuit is still operating correctly.
Coil inductance (signature)
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Sensr Baseline, Values, Inductnce
Modbus register
285–286
The coil inductance is an indication of the magnetic field strength. This value is used as a baseline
to determine if a sensor calibration shift has occurred.
Electrode circuit resistance
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Sensr Baseline, Values, Electrode
Res
Modbus register
289–290
The electrode circuit resistance is an indication of the electrode circuit health. This value is used
as a baseline to determine if the electrode circuit is still operating correctly.
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
103
Reference Manual
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
6.9.2
Establishing the sensor baseline (signature)
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Sensr Baseline, Reset Baseline
Modbus coil
113
There are three typical situations under which baselining will be performed. The baselining
requirements vary for each:

If SMART Meter Verification option (D02) was ordered as an option, the electrodes will
need to be baselined.

If SMART Meter Verification option (D02) was licensed after the initial purchase, both
the coils and the electrodes will need to be baselined.

If you wish to establish new baselines for the coils and/or the electrodes.
Having the transmitter take an initial sensor signature when first installed will provide the
baseline for the verification tests that are done in the future. The sensor baseline should be
taken during the start-up process when the transmitter is first connected to the sensor, with a
full line, and ideally with no flow in the line. Running the sensor baseline procedure when there is
flow in the line is permissible, but this may introduce some noise into the electrode circuit
resistance measurement. If an empty pipe condition exists, then the sensor baseline should only
be run for the coils.
Once the sensor baseline process is complete, the measurements taken during this procedure
are stored in non-volatile memory to prevent loss in the event of a power interruption to the
meter. This initial sensor baseline is required for both manual and continuous SMART Meter
Verification. The first step in running the SMART Meter Verification test is establishing the
reference baseline that the test will use as the baseline for comparison. This is accomplished by
having the transmitter take a baseline of the sensor.
Reset baseline (re-signature meter)
In order to establish the sensor baseline, follow the steps below.
1.
Determine the components of the sensor to be baselined.
2.
Write the corresponding component value to Modbus register 106. See below for
register values.
3.
Initiate the sensor baseline by writing 1 to Modbus coil 113.
When the sensor baseline is complete, the register and coil written above will return to their
default values.
Modbus coil value
104
Baseline operation
0
No action (default)
1
Initiate sensor baseline
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Baseline component selection
There are two components that can be baselined: the coils and the electrodes.
Modbus register
106
Use the register values below to select the components to be baselined. This register must be
set before initiating the sensor baseline.
Register value
Baseline component selection
0
All (coils and electrodes)
1
Coils
2
Electrodes
255
Not initiated (default)
Recall values (recall last saved)
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Sensr Baseline, Recall Values
Modbus coil
114
In the event that the sensor baseline was reset accidentally or incorrectly, this function will
restore the previously saved sensor baseline values.
Modbus coil value
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Signature operation
0
No action
1
Recall last signature values
105
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
6.9.3
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
SMART Meter Verification test criteria
The Smart Meter Verification diagnostic provides the ability to customize the test criteria to
which the verification must be tested. The test criteria can be set for each of the flow conditions
discussed above.
No flow limit
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Test Criteria, No Flow
Modbus register
89
Set the test criteria for the no flow condition. The factory default for this value is set to five
percent with limits configurable between one and ten percent. This parameter applies to
manually initiated test only.
Flowing full limit
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Test Criteria, Flowing Full
Modbus register
88
Set the test criteria for the flowing, full condition. The factory default for this value is set to five
percent with limits configurable between one and ten percent. This parameter applies to
manually initiated tests only.
Empty pipe limit
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Test Criteria, Empty Pipe
Modbus register
87
Set the test criteria for the empty pipe condition. The factory default for this value is set to five
percent with limits configurable between one and ten percent. This parameter applies to
manually initiated test only.
Continuous limit
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Test Criteria, Continual
Modbus register
90
Set the test criteria for the continuous SMART Meter Verification diagnostic. The factory default
for this value is set to five percent with limits configurable between two and ten percent. If the
tolerance band is set too tightly, under empty pipe conditions or noisy flowing conditions, a
false failure of the transmitter test may occur.
106
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
6.10
August 2015
Run manual SMART Meter Verification
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Run Meter Ver
Modbus coil
112
The SMART Meter Verification diagnostic will be available if the advanced diagnostic suite (DA2)
was ordered. If DA2 was not ordered or licensed, this diagnostic will not be available. This
method will initiate the manual meter verification test. In order to run SMART Meter Verification,
follow the steps below.
1.
Determine the existing test condition.
2.
Write the corresponding test condition value to Modbus register 108. See Section
6.10.1.
3.
Determine the test scope.
4.
Write the corresponding test scope value to Modbus register 107. See Section 6.10.2.
5.
Initiate SMART Meter Verification by writing 1 to Modbus coil 112.
Modbus coil value
SMART Meter Verification mode
0
No action (default)
1
Initiate SMART Meter Verification test
When SMART Meter Verification is complete, the Modbus registers and coil entered above will
return to their default values.
6.10.1
Test condition
SMART Meter Verification can be initiated under three possible process conditions. The test
condition is selected at the time that the sensor baseline or SMART Meter Verification test is run.
Modbus register
108
Use the register values below to set the test condition. This register must be set before initiating
SMART Meter Verification.
Register value
Test condition
1
No flow, full pipe
2
flow, full pipe
3
Empty pipe
255
Not initiated (default)
No flow
Run the SMART Meter Verification test with a full pipe and no flow in the line. Running the
SMART Meter Verification test under this condition provides the most accurate results and the
best indication of magnetic flowmeter health.
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
107
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Flowing full
Run the SMART Meter Verification test with a full pipe and flow in the line. Running the SMART
Meter Verification test under this condition provides the ability to verify the magnetic
flowmeter health without shutting down the process flow in applications when a shutdown is
not possible. Running the diagnostic under flowing conditions can cause a false test failure if
there is significant process noise present.
Empty pipe
Run the SMART Meter Verification test with an empty pipe. Running the SMART Meter
Verification test under this condition provides the ability to verify the magnetic flowmeter
health with an empty pipe. Running the verification diagnostic under empty pipe conditions will
not check the electrode circuit health.
6.10.2
Test scope
The manually initiated SMART Meter Verification test can be used to verify the entire flowmeter
installation or individual parts such as the transmitter or sensor. This parameter is set at the time
that the SMART Meter Verification test is manually initiated. There are three test scopes from
which to choose.
Modbus register
107
Use the register values below to set the test scope. This register must be set before initiating
SMART Meter Verification.
Register value
Test scope
0
All (sensor and transmitter)
1
Sensor
2
Transmitter
255
Not initiated (default)
All
Run the SMART Meter Verification test and verify the entire flowmeter installation. This
parameter results in the diagnostic performing the transmitter calibration verification, sensor
calibration verification, coil health check, and electrode health check. Transmitter calibration
and sensor calibration are verified to the percentage associated with the test condition selected
when the test was initiated. This setting applies to manually initiated tests only.
Transmitter
Run the SMART Meter Verification test on the transmitter only. This results in the verification
test only checking the transmitter calibration to the limits of the test criteria selected when the
verification test was initiated. This setting applies to manually initiated tests only.
Sensor
Run the SMART Meter Verification test on the sensor only. This results in the verification test
checking the sensor calibration to the limits of the test criteria selected when the SMART Meter
108
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Verification test was initiated, verifying the coil circuit health, and the electrode circuit health.
This setting applies to manually initiated tests only.
6.11
Continuous SMART Meter Verification
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Diag Controls, Cont Meter Ver
Continuous SMART Meter Verification can be used to monitor and verify the health of the
flowmeter system. The continuous SMART Meter Verification will not report results until 30
minutes after powering up to ensure the system is stable and to avoid false failures.
6.11.1
Test scope
Continuous SMART Meter Verification can be configured to monitor the sensor coils, electrodes,
transmitter calibration, and analog output. All of these parameters can be individually enabled
or disabled. These parameters apply to continuous SMART Meter Verification only.
Coils
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Diag Controls, Cont Meter Ver, Coils
Modbus coil
122
Continuously monitor the sensor coil circuit by enabling this continuous SMART Meter
Verification parameter.
Modbus coil value
Test mode
0
Exclude coil tests in the continuous SMART Meter Verification diagnostic
(default).
1
Include coil tests in the continuous SMART Meter Verification diagnostic.
Electrodes
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Diag Controls, Cont Meter Ver, Electrodes
Modbus coil
123
Continuously monitor the electrode resistance by enabling this continuous SMART Meter
Verification parameter.
Modbus coil value
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Test mode
0
Exclude electrodes tests in the continuous SMART Meter Verification
diagnostic (default).
1
Include electrodes tests in the continuous SMART Meter Verification
diagnostic.
109
Reference Manual
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Transmitter
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Diag Controls, Cont Meter Ver, Transmitter
Modbus coil
124
Continuously monitor the transmitter calibration by enabling this continuous SMART Meter
Verification parameter.
Modbus coil value
6.12
Test mode
0
Exclude transmitter tests in the continuous SMART Meter Verification
diagnostic (default).
1
Include transmitter tests in the continuous SMART Meter Verification
diagnostic.
SMART Meter Verification test results
If the SMART Meter Verification test is manually initiated, the transmitter will make several
measurements to verify the transmitter calibration, sensor calibration, coil circuit health, and
electrode circuits health. The results of these tests can be reviewed and recorded on the
calibration verification report found on page 115. This report can be used to validate that the
meter is within the required calibration limits to comply with governmental regulatory
agencies.
Depending on the method used to view the results, they will be displayed in either a menu
structure, as a method, or in the report format. When using the LOI, the parameters are viewed
as a method using the left arrow key to cycle through the results. In ProLink III, the calibration
report is populated with the necessary data eliminating the need to manually complete the
report found on page 115.
The results are displayed in the order found in the following table. Each parameter displays a
value used in the SMART Meter Verification diagnostic evaluation of the meter health.
Table 6-2. Manual SMART Meter Verification Test Result Parameters
110
Parameter
(Diagnostics, Variables, MV Results, Manual Results)
Modbus
register
1
Test Condition
Test Condition
36
2
Test Criteria
Test Criteria
35
3
8714i Test Result
MV Results
30
4
Simulated Velocity
Sim Velocity
267–268
5
Actual Velocity
ActualVelocity
269–270
6
Velocity Deviation
Flow Sim Dev
271–272
7
Xmtr Cal Test Result
Xmtr Cal Verify
34
8
Sensor Cal Deviation
Sensor Cal Dev
273–274
9
Sensor Cal Test Result
Sensor Cal
31
10
Coil Circuit Test Result
Coil Circuit
32
LOI menu path
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table 6-2. Manual SMART Meter Verification Test Result Parameters (continued)
Parameter
(Diagnostics, Variables, MV Results, Manual Results)
Modbus
register
Electrode Circuit Test Result
Electrode Ckt
33
LOI menu path
11
Table 6-3. Continuous SMART Meter Verification Test Result Parameters
Parameter
(Diagnostics, Variables, MV Results, Continual Res,...)
Modbus
register
1
Continuous Limit
Test Criteria
90
2
Simulated Velocity
Sim Velocity
267–268
3
Actual Velocity
ActualVelocity
235–236
4
Velocity Deviation
Flow Sim Dev
223–224
5
Coil Signature
Coil Inductnce
229–230
6
Sensor Cal Deviation
Sensor Cal Dev
231–232
7
Coil Resistance
Coil Resist
227–228
8
Electrode Resistance
Electrode Res
225–226
LOI menu path
6.13
SMART Meter Verification measurements
The SMART Meter Verification test will make measurements of the coil resistance, coil signature,
and electrode resistance and compare these values to the values taken during the sensor
signature process to determine the sensor calibration deviation, the coil circuit health, and the
electrode circuit health. In addition, the measurements taken by this test can provide additional
information when troubleshooting the meter.
Coil circuit resistance
LOI menu path
Modbus register
Manual: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Measurements, Manual
Measure, Coil Resist
Continuous: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Measurements,
Continual Meas, Coil Resist
Manual: 277–278
Continuous: 227–228
The coil circuit resistance is an indication of the coil circuit health. This value is compared to the
coil circuit resistance baseline measurement taken during the sensor signature process to
determine coil circuit health. This value can be continuously monitored using continuous SMART
Meter Verification.
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
111
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Coil signature
LOI menu path
Modbus register
Manual: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Measurements, Manual
Measure, Coil Inductnce
Continuous: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Measurements,
Continual Meas, Coil Inductnce
Manual: 275–276
Continuous: 229–230
The coil signature is an indication of the magnetic field strength. This value is compared to the
coil signature baseline measurement taken during the sensor signature process to determine
sensor calibration deviation. This value can be continuously monitored using continuous SMART
Meter Verification.
Electrode circuit resistance
LOI menu path
Modbus register
Manual: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Measurements, Manual
Measure, Electrode Res
Continuous: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Measurements,
Continual Meas, Electrode Res
Manual: 279–280
Continuous: 225–226
The electrode circuit resistance is an indication of the electrode circuit health. This value is
compared to the electrode circuit resistance baseline measurement taken during the sensor
signature process to determine electrode circuit health. This value can be continuously
monitored using continuous SMART Meter Verification.
Actual velocity
LOI menu path
Modbus register
Manual: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Measurements, Manual
Measure, Actual Velocity
Continuous: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Measurements,
Continual Meas, Actual Velocity
Manual: 269–270
Continuous: 235–236
The actual velocity is a measurement of the simulated velocity signal. This value is compared to
the simulated velocity to determine transmitter calibration deviation. This value can be
continuously monitored using continuous SMART Meter Verification.
112
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Flow simulation deviation
Manual: Diagnostics, Variables, MV Results, Manual Results, Flow Sim Dev
LOI menu path
Continuous: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Measurements,
Continual Meas, Flow Sim Dev
Modbus register
Manual: 271–272
Continuous: 223–224
The flow simulation deviation is a calculation of the percent difference between the simulated
velocity and the actual measured velocity from the transmitter calibration verification test. This
value can be continuously monitored using continuous SMART Meter Verification.
6.14
Optimizing the SMART Meter Verification
The SMART Meter Verification diagnostic can be optimized by setting the test criteria to the
desired levels necessary to meet the compliance requirements of the application. The following
examples below will provide some guidance on how to set these levels.
Example
An effluent meter must be certified annually to comply with environmental regulations. This
example regulation requires that the meter be certified to five percent.
Since this is an effluent meter, shutting down the process may not be viable. In this instance the
SMART Meter Verification test will be performed under flowing conditions. Set the test criteria
for flowing, full to five percent to meet the requirements of the governmental agencies.
Example
A pharmaceutical company requires bi-annual verification of meter calibration on a critical feed
line for one of their products. This is an internal standard, and the plant requires a calibration
record be kept on-hand. Meter calibration on this process must meet two percent. The process
is a batch process so it is possible to perform the calibration verification with the line full and
with no flow.
Since the SMART Meter Verification test can be run under no flow conditions, set the test criteria
for no flow to two percent to comply with the necessary plant standards.
Example
A food and beverage company requires an annual calibration of a meter on a product line. The
plant standard calls for the accuracy to be three percent or better. They manufacture this
product in batches, and the measurement cannot be interrupted when a batch is in process.
When the batch is complete, the line goes empty.
Since there is no means of performing the SMART Meter Verification test while there is product
in the line, the test must be performed under empty pipe conditions. The test criteria for empty
pipe should be set to three percent, and it should be noted that the electrode circuit health
cannot be verified.
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
113
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
6.14.1
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Optimizing continuous SMART Meter Verification
Example
For continuous SMART Meter Verification, there is only one test criteria value to configure, and it
will be used for all flow conditions. The factory default is set to five percent to minimize the
potential for false failures under empty pipe conditions. For best results, set the criteria to match
the maximum value of the three test criteria set during manual meter verification (no flow,
flowing full, and empty pipe).
For example, a plant might set the following manual meter verification test criteria: two percent
for no flow, three percent for flowing full, and four percent for empty pipe. In this case, the
maximum test criterion is four percent, so the test criteria for continuous SMART Meter
Verification should be set to four percent. If the tolerance band is set too tightly, under empty
pipe conditions or noisy flowing conditions, a false failure of the transmitter test may occur.
114
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Manual Calibration Verification Results
Calibration Verification Report parameters
Calibration Conditions:
q Internal q External
User Name: _____________________________________________
Test Conditions:
q Flowing q No Flow, Full Pipe q Empty Pipe
Tag #:__________________________________________________
Flowmeter information and configuration
Software Tag:
Line Size:
Calibration Number:
PV Damping:____________________________________________
Transmitter Calibration Verification results
Sensor Calibration Verification results
Simulated Velocity:
Sensor Deviation %:_____________________________________
Actual Velocity:
Sensor Test:
Deviation %:
Coil Circuit Test:
q PASS /
q FAIL / q NOT TESTED
Transmitter:
Electrode Circuit Test:
q PASS /
q FAIL / q NOT TESTED
q PASS / q FAIL / q NOT TESTED
q PASS / q FAIL / q NOT TESTED
Summary of Calibration Verification results
Verification Results: The result of the flowmeter verification test is:
q PASSED / q FAILED
Verification Criteria: This meter was verified to be functioning within _____________ % of deviation from the original test parameters.
Signature:____________________________________________
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Date:__________________________________________________
115
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
116
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Section 7: Digital Signal Processing
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Section 7
Digital Signal Processing
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process noise profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High process noise diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimizing flow reading in noisy applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explanation of signal processing algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1
page 117
page 117
page 118
page 118
page 119
page 122
Introduction
Magmeters are used in applications that can create noisy flow readings. The Rosemount
8732EM has the capability to deal with difficult applications that have previously manifested
themselves in a noisy output signal. In addition to selecting a higher coil drive frequency (37 Hz
vs. 5 Hz) to isolate the flow signal from the process noise, the 8732EM microprocessor has
digital signal processing that is capable of rejecting the noise specific to the application. This
section explains the different types of process noise, provides instructions for optimizing the
flow reading in noisy applications, and provides a detailed description of the digital signal
processing functionality.
7.2
Safety messages
Instructions and procedures in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operations. Read the following safety messages before
performing any operation described in this section.
Explosions could result in death or serious injury.
Verify that the operating atmosphere of the sensor and transmitter is consistent with
the appropriate hazardous locations certifications.
Do not remove the transmitter cover in explosive atmospheres when the circuit is live.
Do not connect a Modbus communication tool in an explosive atmosphere. Check
plant safety standards before making any connections.
Both transmitter covers must be fully engaged to meet explosion-proof requirements.




Failure to follow safe installation and servicing guidelines could result in death or
serious injury.




Digital Signal Processing
Make sure only qualified personnel perform the installation.
Do not perform any service other than those contained in this manual unless qualified.
Process leaks could result in death or serious injury.
The electrode compartment may contain line pressure; it must be depressurized
before the cover is removed.
117
Section 7: Digital Signal Processing
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
High voltage that may be present on leads could cause electrical shock.

7.3
Avoid contact with leads and terminals.
Process noise profiles
1/f noise
This type of noise has higher amplitudes at lower frequencies, but generally degrades over
increasing frequencies. Potential sources of 1/f noise include chemical mixing and slurry flow
particles rubbing against the electrodes.
Spike noise
This type of noise generally results in a high amplitude signal at specific frequencies which can
vary depending on the source of the noise. Common sources of spike noise include chemical
injections directly upstream of the flowmeter, hydraulic pumps, and slurry flows with low
concentrations of particles in the stream. The particles bounce off of the electrode generating a
“spike” in the electrode signal. An example of this type of flow stream would be a recycle flow in
a paper mill.
White noise
This type of noise results in a high amplitude signal that is relatively constant over the frequency
range. Common sources of white noise include chemical reactions or mixing that occurs as the
fluid passes through the flowmeter and high concentration slurry flows where the particulates
are constantly passing over the electrode head. An example of this type of flow stream would be
a basis weight stream in a paper mill.
7.4
High process noise diagnostic
The transmitter continuously monitors signal amplitudes over a wide range of frequencies. For
the high process noise diagnostic, the transmitter specifically looks at the signal amplitude at
frequencies of 2.5 Hz, 7.5 Hz, 32.5 Hz, and 42.5 Hz. The transmitter uses the values from 2.5
and 7.5 Hz and calculates an average noise level. This average is compared to the amplitude of
the signal at 5 Hz. If the signal amplitude is not 25 times greater than the noise level, and the coil
drive frequency is set at 5 Hz, the high process noise diagnostic will trip indicating that the flow
signal may be compromised. The transmitter performs the same analysis around the 37.5 Hz
coil drive frequency using the 32.5 Hz and 42.5 Hz values to establish a noise level.
118
Digital Signal Processing
Reference Manual
Section 7: Digital Signal Processing
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
7.5
August 2015
Optimizing flow reading in noisy applications
If the flow reading of the 8732EM is unstable, first check the wiring, grounding, and process
reference associated with the magnetic flowmeter system. Ensure that the following conditions
are met:

Ground straps are attached to the adjacent flange or ground ring

Grounding rings, lining protectors, or a process reference electrode are being used in
lined or non-conductive piping
The causes of unstable transmitter output can usually be traced to extraneous voltages on the
measuring electrodes. This “process noise” can arise from several causes including electrochemical reactions between the fluid and the electrode, chemical reactions in the process itself,
free ion activity in the fluid, or some other disturbance of the fluid/electrode capacitive layer. In
such noisy applications, an analysis of the frequency spectrum reveals process noise that
typically becomes significant below 15 Hz.
In some cases, the effects of process noise may be sharply reduced by elevating the coil drive
frequency above the 15 Hz region. The Rosemount 8732EM coil drive mode is selectable
between the standard 5 Hz and the noise-reducing 37 Hz.
7.5.1
Coil drive frequency
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Additional Params, Coil Drive Freq
Modbus register
77
This parameter changes the pulse rate of the magnetic coils.
Register value
7.5.2
Coil frequency
0
The standard coil drive frequency is 5 Hz, which is sufficient for nearly all
applications.
1
If the process fluid causes a noisy or unstable flow reading, increase the coil
drive frequency to 37 Hz. If the 37 Hz mode is selected, perform the auto
zero function for optimum performance.
Auto zero
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Trims, Auto Zero
Modbus coil
110
To ensure optimum accuracy when using 37 Hz coil drive mode, there is an auto zero function
that should be initiated. When using 37 Hz coil drive mode it is important to zero the system for
the specific application and installation.
Modbus coil value
Digital Signal Processing
Operation mode
0
Normal operating mode (default)
1
Perform auto zero
119
Reference Manual
Section 7: Digital Signal Processing
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
The auto zero procedure should be performed only under the following conditions:

With the transmitter and sensor installed in their final positions. This procedure is not
applicable on the bench.

With the transmitter in 37 Hz coil drive mode. Never attempt this procedure with the
transmitter in 5 Hz coil drive mode.

With the sensor full of process fluid at zero flow.
These conditions should cause an output equivalent to zero flow.
Set the loop to manual if necessary and begin the auto zero procedure. The transmitter
completes the procedure automatically in about 90 seconds. A clock symbol will appear in the
lower right-hand corner of the display to indicate that the procedure is running.
Note
Failure to complete an auto zero may result in a flow velocity error of 5 to10% at1 ft/s (0.3 m/s).
While the output level will be offset by the error, the repeatability will not be affected.
7.5.3
Digital signal processing (DSP)
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Signal Processing
The 8732EM contains several advanced functions that can be used to stabilize erratic outputs
caused by process noise. The signal processing menu contains this functionality.
If the 37 Hz coil drive frequency has been set, and the output is still unstable, the damping and
signal processing function should be used. It is important to set the coil drive frequency to 37 Hz
to increase the flow sampling rate.
The 8732EM provides an easy and straightforward start-up, and also incorporates the capability
to deal with difficult applications that have previously manifested themselves in a noisy output
signal. In addition to selecting a higher coil drive frequency (37 Hz vs. 5 Hz) to isolate the flow
signal from the process noise, the 8732EM microprocessor can actually scrutinize each input
based on three user-defined parameters to reject the noise specific to the application.
Operating mode
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Signal Processing, Operating Mode
Modbus register
79
The operating mode should be used only when the signal is noisy and gives an unstable output.
Filter mode automatically uses 37 Hz coil drive mode and activates signal processing at the
factory set default values. When using filter mode, perform an auto zero with no flow and a full
sensor. Either of the parameters, coil drive mode or signal processing, may still be changed
individually. Turning signal processing off or changing the coil drive frequency to 5 Hz will
automatically change the operating mode from filter mode to normal mode.
120
Digital Signal Processing
Reference Manual
Section 7: Digital Signal Processing
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
This software technique, known as signal processing, “qualifies” individual flow signals based on
historic flow information and three user-definable parameters, plus an on/off control. These
parameters are described below.
Register value
Operating mode
0
Normal mode (default)
1
Filter mode
Status
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Signal Processing, Main Config DSP, Status
Modbus register
78
Enable or disable the DSP capabilities. When ON is selected, the Rosemount 8732EM output is
derived using a running average of the individual flow inputs. Signal processing is a software
algorithm that examines the quality of the electrode signal against user-specified tolerances.
The three parameters that make up signal processing (number of samples, maximum percent
limit, and time limit) are described below.
Register value
Operating mode
0
DSP is turned OFF.
1
DSP is turned ON.
Number of samples
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Signal Processing, Main Config DSP, Samples
Modbus register
80
The number of samples sets the amount of time that inputs are collected and used to calculate
the average value. Each second is divided into tenths with the number of samples equaling the
number of increments used to calculate the average. This parameter can be configured for an
integer value between 1 and 125. The default value is 90 samples.
For example:

A value of 1 averages the inputs over the past 1/10 second

A value of 10 averages the inputs over the past 1 second

A value of 100 averages the inputs over the past 10 seconds

A value of 125 averages the inputs over the past 12.5 seconds
Percent limit
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Signal Processing, Main Config DSP, % Limit
Modbus register
361–362
This parameter will set the tolerance band on either side of the running average, referring to
percent deviation from the average. Values within the limit are accepted while value outside the
limit are scrutinized to determine if they are a noise spike or an actual flow change. This
parameter can be configured for any value between 0.0 and 100.0 percent. The default value is
2.0 percent.
Digital Signal Processing
121
Reference Manual
Section 7: Digital Signal Processing
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Time limit
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Signal Processing, Main Config DSP, Time Limit
Modbus register
363–364
The time limit parameter forces the output and running average values to the new value of an
actual flow rate change that is outside the percent limit boundaries. It thereby limits response
time to flow changes to the time limit value rather than the length of the running average.
If the number of samples selected is 100, then the response time of the system is 10 seconds. In
some cases this may be unacceptable. Setting the time limit forces the 8732EM to clear the value
of the running average and re-establish the output and average at the new flow rate once the
time limit has elapsed. This parameter limits the response time added to the loop. A suggested
time limit value of two seconds is a good starting point for most applicable process fluids. This
parameter can be configured for a value between 0.6 and 256.0 seconds. The default value is
2.0 seconds.
7.6
Explanation of signal processing algorithm
An example plotting flow rate versus time is given below to help visualize the signal processing
algorithm.
Figure 7-1. Signal Processing Functionality
Flow
Rate
Max
%
Limit
Time Limit
10 Samples = 1
Second
Time
X: Input flow signal from sensor.
O: Average flow signals and transmitter output, determined by the number of samples
parameter.
Tolerance band, determined by the percent limit parameter.
- Upper value = average flow + [(percent limit/100) average flow]
- Lower value = average flow - [(percent limit/100) average flow]
122
Digital Signal Processing
Reference Manual
Section 7: Digital Signal Processing
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
1.
This scenario is that of a typical non-noisy flow. The input flow signal is within the
percent limit tolerance band, therefore qualifying itself as a good input. In this case the
new input is added directly into the running average and is passed on as a part of the
average value to the output.
2.
This signal is outside the tolerance band and therefore is held in memory until the next
input can be evaluated. The running average is provided as the output.
3.
The previous signal currently held in memory is simply rejected as a noise spike since
the next flow input signal is back within the tolerance band. This results in complete
rejection of noise spikes rather than allowing them to be “averaged” with the good
signals as occurs in the typical analog damping circuits.
4.
As in number 2 above, the input is outside the tolerance band. This first signal is held in
memory and compared to the next signal. The next signal is also outside the tolerance
band (in the same direction), so the stored value is added to the running average as the
next input and the running average begins to slowly approach the new input level.
5.
To avoid waiting for the slowly incrementing average value to catch up to the new level
input, an algorithm is provided. This is the “time limit” parameter. The user can set this
parameter to eliminate the slow ramping of the output toward the new input level.
Digital Signal Processing
123
Section 7: Digital Signal Processing
August 2015
124
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Digital Signal Processing
Section 8: Maintenance
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Section 8
Maintenance
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Local Operator Interface (LOI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing 8732EM revision 4 electronics stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing socket module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1
page 125
page 125
page 126
page 127
page 129
page 132
Introduction
This section covers basic transmitter maintenance. Instructions and procedures in this section
may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the
operations. Read the following safety messages before performing any operation described in
this section. Refer to these warnings when appropriate throughout this section.
8.2
Safety information
Failure to follow these guidelines could result in death or serious injury.
Installation and servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. Do not
perform any servicing other than that contained in the operating instructions, unless
qualified. Verify that the operating environment of the sensor and transmitter is
consistent with the appropriate hazardous area approval.
Do not connect a Rosemount 8732EM to a non-Rosemount sensor that is located in an
explosive atmosphere.
Mishandling products exposed to a hazardous substance may result in death or serious
injury. If the product being returned was exposed to a hazardous substance as defined by
OSHA, a copy of the required Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each hazardous
substance identified must be included with the returned goods.
Maintenance
125
Reference Manual
Section 8: Maintenance
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
8.3
Installing a Local Operator Interface (LOI)
Figure 8-1. Installing a Local Operator Interface (LOI)
126
1.
If the transmitter is installed in a control loop, secure the loop.
2.
Remove power from the transmitter.
3.
Remove the cover on the electronics compartment of the transmitter housing. If the
cover has a cover jam screw, loosen it before removing the cover. See “Cover jam screw”
on page 33 for details on the cover jam screw.
4.
On the electronics stack, locate the serial connection labeled “DISPLAY”. See Figure
8-1.
5.
Plug the serial connector from the back of the LOI into the receptacle on the electronics
stack. The LOI can be rotated in 90 degree increments to provide the best viewing
position. Rotate the LOI to the desired orientation, taking care to not exceed 360
degrees of rotation. Exceeding 360 degrees of rotation could damage the LOI cable
and/or connector.
6.
Once the serial connector is installed on the electronics stack, and the LOI is oriented in
the desired position, tighten the three mounting screws.
7.
Install the extended cover with the glass viewing pane and tighten to metal-to-metal
contact. If the cover has a cover jam screw, this must be tightened to comply with
installation requirements. Return power to the transmitter and verify that it is
functioning correctly and reporting the expected flow rate.
8.
If installed in a control loop, return the loop to automatic control.
Maintenance
Reference Manual
Section 8: Maintenance
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
8.4
August 2015
Replacing 8732EM revision 4 electronics stack
Prior to installing the replacement electronics stack, it is important to verify that the transmitter
housing you have is of the correct design to accept the Revision 4 electronics.
Follow the steps below to confirm the transmitter housing is compatible with this electronics
kit.
1.
Verify the model number is 8732EM. If the transmitter model is not 8732EM, then
these electronics are not compatible. See Figure 8-2 for the location of the model
number. If the model is 8732C, 8742C, 8732ES, or some other model, then these
electronics are not compatible with the enclosure. If you have one of these
transmitters, a full replacement transmitter will be required. Consult the 8700M
Product Data Sheet (00813-0100-4444) for details on ordering a new transmitter.
Figure 8-2. Transmitter Nameplate Location
Maintenance
127
Reference Manual
Section 8: Maintenance
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
2.
Verify the electronics board inside the housing is green and looks like the board
pictured on the left in Figure 8-3. If the board is not green, or does not look like the
board pictured, then the electronics are not compatible.
Figure 8-3. Transmitter Housing Electronics Board Identification
3.
Confirm the electronics stack is for an 8732EM Transmitter. Refer to the picture on the
left in Figure 8-4.
Figure 8-4. Electronics Stack Identification
8732EM Stack Board
128
8732ES Electronics Stack
Maintenance
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
8.5
Section 8: Maintenance
August 2015
Replacing socket module
The socket module connects the sensor adapter to the transmitter. There are two versions of
the socket module - one for integral mount transmitters and one for remote mount
transmitters. The socket module is a replaceable component.
To remove the socket module, loosen the two mounting screws and pull up on the socket
module from the base. When removing the socket module, do not pull on the wires. See
Figure 8-5.
Figure 8-5. Socket Module Warning
Maintenance
129
Reference Manual
Section 8: Maintenance
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
8.5.1
Integral mount socket module
The integral mount socket module is shown in Figure 8-6. To gain access to the socket module,
the transmitter must be removed from the sensor adapter.
Figure 8-6. Socket Module—Integral Mount
Removing integral mount socket module
130
1.
Disconnect power.
2.
Remove electronics cover to gain access to the coil and electrode cables.
3.
If the transmitter has an LOI, it will need to be removed to gain access to the coil and
electrode cables.
4.
Disconnect the coil and electrode cables.
5.
Remove the four transmitter mounting screws.
6.
Lift the transmitter off of the sensor adapter.
7.
To remove the socket module, loosen the two mounting screws and pull up on the
socket module from the base.
8.
When removing the socket module, do not pull on the wires. See Figure 8-5.
Maintenance
Reference Manual
Section 8: Maintenance
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Installing integral mount socket module
8.5.2
1.
To insert a new integral mount socket module, press the base into its keyed position
and tighten the two mounting screws.
2.
The coil and electrode cables are fed through the bottom opening of the transmitter
and plugged into the face of the electronics. The coil and electrode cables are keyed so
they will only fit into their dedicated location.
3.
Once the connections are made, the transmitter can be secured to the sensor adapter
using the four mounting bolts.
4.
If the transmitter has an LOI, it will need to be reinstalled.
5.
Replace electronics cover.
6.
Reconnect power.
Replacing terminal block socket module
The terminal block socket module is shown in Figure 8-7. To gain access to the socket module,
remove the junction box from the sensor adapter.
Figure 8-7. Socket Module—Terminal Block
Maintenance
131
Reference Manual
Section 8: Maintenance
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Removing terminal block socket module
1.
Disconnect power to the transmitter and the remote cabling connected to the terminal
block.
2.
Remove the junction box cover to gain access to the remote cabling.
3.
To disconnect the terminal block from the junction box housing, remove the two
mounting screws and the two divider mounting screws (if applicable).
4.
Pull up on the terminal block to expose the socket module base.
5.
To remove the socket module, loosen the two mounting screws and pull up on the
socket module from the base.
6.
When removing the socket module, do not pull on the wires. See Figure 8-5.
Installing terminal block socket module
8.6
1.
Insert the new terminal block socket module, press the base into its keyed position, and
tighten the two mounting screws.
2.
Connect the terminal block to the junction box housing by tightening the two
mounting screws. Install the divider with the two mounting screws if applicable.
3.
Reconnect remote cabling and power and replace junction box cover.
Trims
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Trims
Trims are used to calibrate the transmitter, re-zero the transmitter, and calibrate the transmitter
with another manufacturer's sensor. Proceed with caution whenever performing a trim
function.
8.6.1
Digital trim
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Trims, Digital Trim
Modbus coil
109
Digital trim is the function by which the factory calibrates the transmitter. This procedure is
rarely needed by users. It is only necessary if the Rosemount 8732EM is suspected to be no
longer accurate. A Rosemount 8714D Calibration Standard is required to complete a digital trim.
Attempting a digital trim without a Rosemount 8714D Calibration Standard may result in an
inaccurate transmitter or an error message. The digital trim must be performed with the coil
drive mode set to 5Hz and with a nominal sensor calibration number stored in the memory.
132
Maintenance
Reference Manual
Section 8: Maintenance
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Note
Attempting a digital trim without a Rosemount 8714D Calibration Standard may result in an
inaccurate transmitter, or a “DIGITAL TRIM FAILURE” message may appear. If this message
occurs, no values were changed in the transmitter. Simply cycle power on the Rosemount
8732EM to clear the message.
Modbus coil value
Operating mode
0
Normal operating mode
1
Perform digital trim
To simulate a nominal sensor with the Rosemount 8714D Calibration Standard, change/verify
the following parameters in the Rosemount 8732EM:

Calibration Number-1000015010000000

Units-ft/s

Coil Drive Frequency-5Hz
Note
Before changing any of the configuration parameters, be sure to record the original values so
that the transmitter can be returned to the original configuration prior to being placed back into
operation. Failure to return the settings to the original configuration will result in incorrect flow
and totalizer readings.
The instructions for changing the calibration number and units are located in “Basic setup” on
page 35. Instructions for changing the coil drive frequency can be found on “Coil drive
frequency” on page 119.
Set the loop to manual (if necessary) and then complete the following steps:
Maintenance
1.
Power down the transmitter.
2.
Connect the transmitter to a Rosemount 8714D Calibration Standard.
3.
Power up the transmitter with the Rosemount 8714D connected and read the flow rate.
The electronics need about a 5-minute warm-up time to stabilize.
4.
Set the 8714D Calibration Standard to the 30 ft/s (9.1 m/s) setting.
5.
The flow rate reading after warm-up should be between 29.97 (9.1 m/s) and 30.03 ft/s
(9.2 m/s).
6.
If the reading is within the range, return the transmitter to the original configuration
parameters.
7.
If the reading is not within this range, initiate a digital trim with the LOI or Modbus
configuration tool. The digital trim takes about 90 seconds to complete. No transmitter
adjustments are required.
133
Reference Manual
Section 8: Maintenance
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
8.6.2
Universal trim
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Trims, Universal Trim
Modbus coil
111
The universal auto trim function enables the Rosemount 8732EM to calibrate sensors that were
not calibrated at the Rosemount factory. The function is activated as one step in a procedure
known as in-process calibration. If a Rosemount sensor has a 16-digit calibration number,
in-process calibration is not required. If it does not, or if the sensor is made by another
manufacturer, complete the following steps for in-process calibration. Refer to Appendix E
Implementing a Universal Transmitter.
Modbus coil value
1.
Operating mode
0
Normal operating mode
1
Perform universal trim
Determine the flow rate of the process fluid in the sensor.
Note
The flow rate in the line can be determined by using another sensor in the line, by counting the
revolutions of a centrifugal pump, or by performing a bucket test to determine how fast a given
volume is filled by the process fluid. Flow rate must be greater than 1 ft / sec.
2.
Write the flow rate to Modbus register 331.
3.
Initiate the universal trim by writing 1 to Modbus coil 111.
When the trim is completed, the sensor is ready for use. The flow rate entered in Step 2 will be
set back to the default value of 0.
134
Maintenance
Section 9: Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Section 9
Troubleshooting
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation check and guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensor troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1
page 135
page 136
page 136
page 138
page 147
page 150
page 156
page 156
Introduction
This section covers basic transmitter and sensor troubleshooting. Problems in the magnetic
flowmeter system are usually indicated by incorrect output readings from the system, error
messages, or failed tests. Consider all sources when identifying a problem in the system. If the
problem persists, consult the local Rosemount® representative to determine if the material
should be returned to the factory. Emerson® Process Management offers several diagnostics
that aid in the troubleshooting process. Instructions and procedures in this section may require
special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Read the
following safety messages before performing any operation described in this section. Refer to
these warnings when appropriate throughout this section.
The Rosemount 8732EM performs self-diagnostics on the entire magnetic flowmeter system:
the transmitter, the sensor, and the interconnecting wiring. By sequentially troubleshooting
each individual piece of the magmeter system, it becomes easier to identify the problem and
make the appropriate adjustments.
If there are problems with a new magmeter installation, see 9.3 Installation check and guide
below for a quick guide to solve the most common installation problems. For existing magmeter
installations, Table on page 147 lists the most common magmeter problems and corrective
actions.
Troubleshooting
135
Section 9: Troubleshooting
9.2
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Safety information
Failure to follow these guidelines could result in death or serious injury.
Installation and servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. Do not
perform any servicing other than that contained in the operating instructions, unless
qualified. Verify that the operating environment of the sensor and transmitter is
consistent with the appropriate hazardous area approval.
Do not connect a Rosemount 8732EM to a non-Rosemount sensor that is located in an
explosive atmosphere.
Mishandling products exposed to a hazardous substance may result in death or serious
injury. If the product being returned was exposed to a hazardous substance as defined by
OSHA, a copy of the required Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each hazardous
substance identified must be included with the returned goods.
9.3
Installation check and guide
Use this guide to check new installations of Rosemount magnetic flowmeter systems that
appear to malfunction.
9.3.1
Transmitter
Before applying power to the magnetic flowmeter system, make the following transmitter
checks:
1.
Record the transmitter model number and serial number.
2.
Visually inspect the transmitter for any damage including the terminal block.
3.
Verify the proper wiring connections have been made for the power and outputs.
Apply power to the magnetic flowmeter system before making the following transmitter
checks:
136
1.
Check for any active error message or status alert. Refer to 9.4 Diagnostic messages.
2.
Verify the correct sensor calibration number is entered in the transmitter. The
calibration number is listed on the sensor nameplate.
3.
Verify the correct sensor line size is entered in the transmitter. The line size value is
listed on the sensor nameplate.
4.
If desired, use a Rosemount 8714D to verify the transmitter calibration.
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
Section 9: Troubleshooting
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
9.3.2
August 2015
Sensor
Be sure power to magnetic flowmeter system is removed before beginning the following sensor
checks:
9.3.3
1.
Record the sensor model number and serial number.
2.
Visually inspect the sensor for any damage including inside the remote junction box, if
applicable.
3.
For horizontal flow installations, ensure that the electrodes remain covered by process
fluid. For vertical or inclined installations, ensure that the process fluid is flowing up into
the sensor to keep the electrodes covered by process fluid.
4.
Verify the flow arrow is pointing in the same direction as forward flow.
5.
Ensure the grounding straps on the sensor are connected to grounding rings, lining
protectors, or the adjacent pipe flanges. Improper grounding will cause erratic
operation of the system. Sensors with a ground electrode will not require the
grounding straps to be connected. Refer to Section 2: Process reference connection for
detailed information.
Remote wiring
1.
The electrode signal and coil drive wires must be separate cables, unless Rosemount
specified combo cable is used. See 2.12 Wiring the transmitter.
2.
The electrode signal wire and coil drive wire must be twisted shielded cable.
Rosemount recommends 20 AWG twisted shielded cable for the electrode signal and
14 AWG twisted shielded cable for the coil drive. See 2.12 Wiring the transmitter.
3.
See Appendix B Approval Information regarding wiring installation requirements.
4.
See Appendix D Wiring Diagrams for component and/or combination cable wiring.
5.
Verify there is minimal exposed wiring and shielding. Less than 1 inch (25mm) is
recommended.
6.
The conduit that houses both the electrode signal and coil drive cables should not
contain any other wires. This includes wires from other magmeters.
Note
For installations requiring intrinsically safe electrodes, the signal and coil drive cables must be
run in individual conduits.
Troubleshooting
137
Reference Manual
Section 9: Troubleshooting
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
9.3.4
9.4
Process fluid
1.
The process fluid must have a minimum conductivity of 5 microsiemens/cm (5 micro
mhos/cm).
2.
The process fluid must be free of air and gases.
3.
The sensor must be full of process fluid.
4.
The process fluid must be compatible with the wetted materials - liner, electrodes,
ground rings, and lining protectors. Refer to the Rosemount Technical Note titled
“Rosemount Magnetic Flowmeter Material Selection Guide” (00816-0100-3033) for
details.
5.
If the process is electrolytic or has cathodic protection, refer to the Rosemount
Technical Note titled “Installation and Grounding of Magmeters in Typical and Special
Applications” (00840-2400-4727) for special installation requirements.
Diagnostic messages
Problems in the magnetic flowmeter system are usually indicated by incorrect output readings
from the system, error messages, or failed tests. Consider all sources in identifying a problem in
the system.
Table 9-1. Modbus Communication Diagnostic Messages
Error message
Potential cause
I/O Processor Failure
ROM failure
Checksum failure
Corrective action
• Use LOI to re-set Modbus communication
• Cycle power to transmitter
• Replace electronics
RAM failure
Stack failure
Register failure
Modbus Non-volatile Memory Error
The non-volatile memory on the
Modbus processor is corrupted
• Cycle power
• Replace electronics
Modbus in Listen-Only Mode
The listen-only mode was activated in
the host or through the LOI
• Use host system or LOI to turn off listen-only mode
No communication with the Modbus
processor for 10 seconds
• Use LOI to re-set Modbus communication
Modbus network error
• Verify all wiring is correct and terminations are
sound
• Cycle power
• Replace electronics
Trying to complete a trim or test with an
uninitialized value for a test parameter
• Consult section of the manual for applicable trim or
test
• Verify all parameters are configured
I/O Processor Comm Failure
Invalid parameter error (not found
on LOI)
138
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
Section 9: Troubleshooting
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table 9-2. Basic Diagnostic Messages
Error message
Potential cause
Empty Pipe
Empty pipe
• None - message will clear when pipe is full
Wiring error
• Check that wiring matches appropriate wiring diagrams
Electrode error
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 154
Conductivity less than 5
microsiemens per cm
• Increase conductivity to greater than or equal to 5 microsiemens per
cm
Intermittent diagnostic
• Adjust tuning of empty pipe parameters - see Section 8.4.1
Improper wiring
• Check coil drive wiring and sensor coils
Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 154
Other manufacturer’s sensor
• Change coil current to 75 mA - set calibration numbers to
10000550100000030
• Perform a universal auto-trim to select the proper coil current
Electronics board failure
• Replace 8732EM electronics stack
Coil circuit open fuse
• Return the unit to the factory for fuse replacement
Flow is not set to zero
• Force flow to zero, perform auto zero trim
Unshielded cable in use
• Change wire to shielded cable
Moisture problems
• See Table 9-8 on page 154
No flow in pipe while performing
Universal Auto Trim
• Establish a known flow rate, and perform universal auto-trim
calibration
Wiring error
• Check that wiring matches appropriate wiring diagrams - see
Implementing a Universal Transmitter on page 239
Flow rate is changing in pipe while
performing Universal Auto-Trim
routine
• Establish a constant flow rate, and perform universal auto-trim
calibration
Flow rate through sensor is
significantly different than value
entered during Universal Auto-Trim
routine
• Verify flow in sensor and perform universal auto-trim calibration
Incorrect calibration number
entered into transmitter for
Universal Auto-Trim routine
• Replace sensor calibration number with 1000005010000000
Wrong sensor size selected
• Correct sensor size setting - see Line size (Register 65) on page 37
Sensor failure
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 154
Electronics self check failure
• Cycle power to see if diagnostic message clears
• Replace electronics stack
Electronics Temp Fail
Ambient temperature exceeded the
electronics temperature limits
• Move transmitter to a location with an ambient temperature range of
-40 to 140 °F (-40 to 60 °C)
Reverse Flow
Electrode or coil wires reverse
• Verify wiring between sensor and transmitter
Flow is reverse
• Turn ON Reverse Flow Enable to read flow
Sensor installed backwards
• Install sensor correctly, or switch either the electrode wires (18 and
19) or the coil wires (1 and 2)
Coil Open Circuit
Auto Zero Failure
Auto-Trim Failure
Electronics Failure
Troubleshooting
Corrective action
139
Reference Manual
Section 9: Troubleshooting
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table 9-2. Basic Diagnostic Messages (continued)
Error message
Potential cause
PZR Activated
(Positive Zero Return)
External voltage applied to
terminals 5 and 6
• Remove voltage to turn PZR off
The transmitter is trying to
generate a frequency greater than
allowed
• Standard pulse - increase pulse scaling to prevent pulse output from
exceeding 11,000 Hz
• Pulse output is in fixed pulse mode and is trying to generate a
frequency greater than the pulse width can support - see Pulse width
on page 72
• Verify the sensor calibration number and line size are correctly
entered in the electronics
Flow rate is greater than 43 ft/sec
• Lower flow velocity, increase pipe diameter
Improper wiring
• Check coil drive wiring and sensor coils
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 154
The calibrator (8714B/C/D) is not
connected properly
• Review calibrator connections
Incorrect calibration number
entered into transmitter
• Replace sensor calibration number with 1000015010000000
Calibrator is not set to 30 FPS
• Change calibrator setting to 30 FPS
Bad calibrator or calibrator cable
• Replace calibrator and/or calibrator cable
Improper wiring
• Check coil drive wiring and sensor coils
Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 154
Transmitter failure
• Replace the electronics stack
Improper wiring
• Check coil drive wiring and sensor coils
Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 154
Incorrect calibration number
• Verify configured calibration number matches sensor tag
Transmitter connected to other
manufacturer’s sensor
• Change coil current to 75 mA - set calibration number to
10000550100000030
• Perform a universal auto-trim to select the proper coil current
Coil drive frequency set to 37 Hz
• Sensor may not be compatible with 37 Hz. Switch coil drive frequency
to 5 Hz.
Sensor failure
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 154
Improper wiring
• See Wiring the transmitter on page 23
Improper process reference
• See Process reference connection on page 19
Improper earth grounding
• Verify earth ground connections - see Wiring the transmitter on
page 23
Pulse Out of Range
Flowrate > 43 ft/sec
Digital Trim Failure
(Cycle power to clear
messages, no changes
were made)
Coil Over Current
Coil Power Limit
Electrode Saturation
140
Corrective action
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
Section 9: Troubleshooting
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table 9-3. Advanced Process Diagnostic Messages
Error message
Potential cause
Grounding/Wiring Fault
Improper installation of wiring
• See Wiring the transmitter on page 23
Coil/electrode shield not
connected
• See Wiring the transmitter on page 23
Improper process grounding
• See Process reference connection on page 19
Faulty ground connection
• Check wiring for corrosion, moisture in the terminal block -see
Process reference connection on page 19
Sensor not full
• Verify sensor is full
• Enable empty pipe detection
Slurry flows - mining/pulp stock
• Decrease the flow rate below 10 ft/s (3 m/s)
• Complete the possible solutions listed under Troubleshooting high
process noise on page 144
Chemical additives upstream of the
sensor
• Move injection point downstream of the sensor or move the sensor
to a new location
• Complete the possible solutions listed under Troubleshooting high
process noise on page 144
Electrode not compatible with the
process fluid
• Refer to the Rosemount Magnetic Flowmeter Material Selection
Guide (00816-0100-3033)
Gas/air in line
• Move the sensor to another location in the process line to ensure
that it is full under all conditions
Electrode coating
• Enable coated electrode etection diagnostic
• Use bullet-nose electrodes
• Downsize sensor to increase flowrate above 3 ft/s (1 m/s)
• Periodically clean sensor
Styrofoam or other insulating
particles
• Complete the possible solutions listed under Troubleshooting high
process noise on page 144
• Consult factory
Low conductivity fluids
(below 10 microsiemens/cm)
• Trim electrode and coil wires - see Sensor installation on page 12
• Use integral mount transmitter
• Set coil drive frequency to 37Hz
Coating is starting to buildup on
electrode and interfering with
measurement signal
• Schedule maintenance to clean electrode
• Use bullet nose electrodes
• Downsize sensor to increase flow rate above 3ft/s (1ms)
Process fluid conductivity has
changed
• Verify process fluid conductivity
Coating has built-up on electrode
and is interfering with
measurement signal
• Schedule maintenance to clean electrode
• Use bullet nose electrodes
• Downsize sensor to increase flow rate above 3ft/s (1ms)
Process fluid conductivity has
changed
• Verify process fluid conductivity
High Process Noise
Electrode Coating Level 1
Electrode Coating Level 2
Troubleshooting
Corrective action
141
Reference Manual
Section 9: Troubleshooting
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table 9-4. Advanced Meter Verification Messages
Error message
8714i Failed
Potential cause
Corrective action
Transmitter calibration verification
test failed
• Verify pass/fail criteria
• Rerun Smart™ Meter Verification (8714i) under no flow conditions
• Verify calibration using 8714 Calibration Standard
• Perform digital trim
• Replace electronics board
Sensor calibration test failed
• Verify pass/fail criteria
• Rerun Smart Meter Verification (8714i)
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 154
Sensor coil circuit test failed
• Verify pass/fail criteria
• Rerun Smart Meter Verification (8714i)
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 154
Sensor electrode circuit test failed
• Verify electrode resistance has a baseline (signature) value from a full
pipe baseline
• Verify test condition was selected properly
• Verify pass/fail criteria
• Rerun Smart Meter Verification (8714i)
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 154
Transmitter calibration verification
test failed
• Verify pass/fail criteria
• Run manual Smart Meter Verification (8714i) under no flow conditions
• Verify calibration using 8714D Calibration Standard
• Perform digital trim
• Replace electronics stack
Sensor calibration test failed
• Run manual Smart Meter Verification (8714i)
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 154
Sensor coil circuit test failed
• Run manual Smart Meter Verification (8714i)
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 154
Sensor electrode circuit test failed
• Run manual Smart Meter Verification (8714i)
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 154
• Verify electrode resistance has a signature value from a full pipe
baseline
Unstable flow rate during the
verification test or noisy process
• Run manual transmitter verification test with no flow and a full pipe
Transmitter drift or faulty
electronics
• Verify transmitter electronics with 8714D Calibration Standard. The
dial on the 8714D should be set to 30 ft/s (9.14 m/s). The transmitter
should be set up with the nominal calibration number
(1000015010000000) and 5 Hz coil drive frequency.
• Perform an electronics trim using the 8714
• If the electronics trim doesn't correct the issue, replace the electronics
Coil Resistance Out of
Spec
Moisture in the terminal block of
the sensor or shorted coil
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 154
• If the problem persists, replace the sensor
Coil Signature Out of
Spec
Moisture in the terminal block of
the sensor or shorted coil
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 154
• If the problem persists, replace the sensor
Calibration shift caused by heat
cycling or vibration
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 154
• If the problem persists, replace the sensor
Continuous Meter
Verification Error
Simulated Velocity Out
of Spec
142
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
Section 9: Troubleshooting
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table 9-4. Advanced Meter Verification Messages (continued)
Error message
Potential cause
Electrode Resistance Out
of Spec
9.4.1
Corrective action
Moisture in the terminal block of
the sensor
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 154
• If the problem persists, replace the sensor
Electrode coating
• Enable coated electrode detection diagnostic
• Use bullet-nose electrodes
• Downsize sensor to increases flowrate above 3 ft/s (1 m/s)
• Periodically clean sensor
Shorted electrodes
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 154
• If the problem persists, replace the sensor
Troubleshooting empty pipe
The following actions can be taken if empty pipe detection is unexpected:
Troubleshooting
1.
Verify the sensor is full.
2.
Verify the sensor has not been installed with a measurement electrode at the top of the
pipe.
3.
Decrease the sensitivity by setting the empty pipe trigger level to a value of at least 20
counts above the empty pipe value read with a full pipe.
4.
Decrease the sensitivity by increasing the empty pipe counts to compensate for process
noise. The empty pipe counts is the number of consecutive empty pipe value readings
above the empty pipe trigger level required to activate the empty pipe diagnostic. The
count range is 2-50, factory default set at 5.
5.
Increase process fluid conductivity above 50 microsiemens/cm.
6.
Properly connect the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter. Corresponding
terminal block numbers in the sensor and transmitter must be connected.
7.
Perform the sensor electrical resistance tests. For more detailed information, consult
Table 9-8 on page 154.
143
Section 9: Troubleshooting
9.4.2
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Troubleshooting ground/wiring fault
If transmitter detects high levels (greater than 5mV) 50/60 Hz noise caused by improper wiring
or poor process grounding:
9.4.3
1.
Verify the transmitter is earth grounded.
2.
Connect ground rings, grounding electrode, lining protector, or grounding straps.
Grounding diagrams can be found in Process reference connection on page 19.
3.
Verify the sensor is full.
4.
Verify wiring between sensor and transmitter is prepared properly. Shielding should be
stripped back less than 1 inch (25 mm).
5.
Use separate shielded twisted pairs for wiring between sensor and transmitter.
6.
Properly connect the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter. Corresponding
terminal block numbers in the sensor and transmitter must be connected.
Troubleshooting high process noise
The transmitter detected high levels of process noise. If the signal to noise ratio is less than 25
while operating in 5 Hz mode, proceed with the following steps:
1.
Increase transmitter coil drive frequency to 37 Hz (refer to Coil drive frequency on
page 119) and, if possible, perform auto zero function (Auto zero on page 119).
2.
Verify sensor is electrically connected to the process with process reference electrode,
grounding rings with grounding straps, or lining protector with grounding straps.
3.
If possible, redirect chemical additions downstream of the magmeter.
4.
Verify process fluid conductivity is above 10 microsiemens/cm.
If the signal to noise ratio is less than 25 while operating in 37 Hz mode, proceed with the
following steps:
144
1.
Turn on the Digital Signal Processing (DSP) technology and follow the setup procedure
(see Section 7 Digital Signal Processing). This will minimize the level of damping in the
flow measurement and control loop while also stabilizing the reading to minimize valve
actuation.
2.
Increase damping to stabilize the signal (refer to Flow damping on page 89). This will
add response time to the control loop.
3.
Move to a Rosemount High-Signal flowmeter system. This flowmeter will deliver a
stable signal by increasing the amplitude of the flow signal by 10 times to increase the
signal to noise ratio. For example if the signal to noise ratio (SNR) of a standard
magmeter is 5, the High-Signal would have a SNR of 50 in the same application. The
Rosemount High-Signal system is comprised of the 8707 sensor which has modified
coils and magnetics and the 8712H High-Signal transmitter (only available with HART
output).
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
Section 9: Troubleshooting
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Note
In applications where very high levels of noise are a concern, it is recommended that a
dual-calibrated Rosemount High-Signal 8707 sensor be used. These sensors can be calibrated to
run at lower coil drive current supplied by the standard Rosemount transmitters, but can also be
upgraded by changing to the 8712H High-Signal transmitter.
1/f noise
This type of noise has higher amplitudes at lower frequencies, but generally degrades over
increasing frequencies. Potential sources of 1/f noise include chemical mixing and slurry flow
particles rubbing against the electrodes. This type of noise can be mitigated by switching to the
37Hz coil drive frequency.
Spike noise
This type of noise generally results in a high amplitude signal at specific frequencies which can
vary depending on the source of the noise. Common sources of spike noise include chemical
injections directly upstream of the flowmeter, hydraulic pumps, and slurry flows with low
concentrations of particles in the stream. The particles bounce off of the electrode generating a
“spike” in the electrode signal. An example of this type of flow stream would be a recycle flow in
a paper mill. The type of noise can be mitigated by switching to the 37Hz coil drive frequency
and enabling the digital signal processing.
White noise
This type of noise results in a high amplitude signal that is relatively constant over the frequency
range. Common sources of white noise include chemical reactions or mixing that occurs as the
fluid passes through the flowmeter and high concentration slurry flows where the particulates
are constantly passing over the electrode head. An example of this type of flow stream would be
a basis weight stream in a paper mill. This type of noise can be mitigated by switching to the
37Hz coil drive frequency and enabling the digital signal processing.
9.4.4
Troubleshooting coated electrode detection
In the event that electrode coating is detected, use the following table to determine the
appropriate course of action.
Table 9-5. Troubleshooting the Electrode Coating Diagnostic
Error message
Potential causes of error
Steps to correct
Electrode Coating Level 1
• Insulating coating is starting to build up
on the electrode and may interfere with
the flow measurement signal
• Process fluid conductivity has decreased
to a level close to operational limits of the
meter
• Verify process fluid conductivity
• Schedule maintenance to clean the electrodes
• Use bullet nose electrodes
• Replace the meter with a smaller diameter meter to
increase the flow velocity to above 3 ft/s (1 m/s)
Electrode Coating Level 2
• Insulating coating has built up on the
electrodes and is interfering with the
flow measurement signal
• Process fluid conductivity has decreased
to a level below the operational limits of
the meter
• Verify process fluid conductivity
• Schedule maintenance to clean the electrodes
• Use bullet nose electrodes
• Replace the meter with a smaller diameter meter to
increase the flow velocity to above 3 ft/s (1 m/s)
Troubleshooting
145
Reference Manual
Section 9: Troubleshooting
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
9.4.5
Troubleshooting SMART™ Meter Verification
In the event that the Smart Meter Verification test fails, use the following table to determine the
appropriate course of action. Begin by reviewing the Smart Meter Verification test results to
determine the specific test that failed.
Table 9-6. Troubleshooting the Smart Meter Verification Diagnostic
Test
Potential cause
Corrective action
Transmitter Verification Test
• Unstable flow reading during the
test
• Noise in the process
• Transmitter drift
• Faulty electronics
• Electrode circuit saturation
• Rerun Smart Meter Verification (8714i) under No Flow
conditions
• Check the transmitter calibration with the 8714D
Calibration Standard
• Perform a digital trim
• Replace the electronics stack
Sensor Calibration Verification
• Moisture in the sensor terminal
block
• Calibration shift caused by heat
cycling or vibration
Coil Circuit Health
• Rerun Smart Meter Verification (8714i)
• Perform the sensor checks detailed in step 3 of the
Quick Troubleshooting guide on page 100
• Remove the sensor and send back for evaluation and /
or recalibration
• Moisture in the sensor terminal
block
• Shorted Coil
Electrode Circuit Health
• Electrode resistance baseline was
not taken after installation
• Test condition was not selected
properly
• Moisture in the sensor terminal
block
• Coated electrodes
• Shorted electrodes
146
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
Section 9: Troubleshooting
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
9.5
August 2015
Basic troubleshooting
When troubleshooting a magmeter, it is important to identify the issue. Table 9-7 below
provides common symptoms displayed by a magmeter that is not functioning properly. This
table provides potential causes and suggested corrective actions for each symptom.
Table 9-7. Common Magmeter Issue
Symptom
Status Is bad
Potential cause
Corrective action
• Electronics failure
• Cycle power
• If status is still bad, verify transmitter operation with an 8714 D
Calibration Standard
• Replace the electronics stack
• Open coil circuit
• Check coil drive circuit connections at the sensor and at the transmitter
• Coil power or coil current is
over limit
• Check coil drive circuit connections at the sensor and at the transmitter
• Cycle power
• If status is still bad, verify transmitter operation with an 8714 D
Calibration Standard
• Replace the electronics stack
• Connected to incompatible
sensor
• See Implementing a Universal Transmitter on page 239
• Communication parameter
mismatch
• Verify Modbus communication parameters in the transmitter match the
communication parameters in the host system
• Wiring error
• Check pulse output wiring at terminals 3 and 4. Refer to wiring diagram
for pulse counter and pulse output. See Connect pulse output on
page 41.
• PZR activated
• Remove signal at terminals 5 and 6 to deactivate the PZR.
• No power to transmitter
• Check pulse output wiring at terminals 3 and 4. Refer to wiring diagram
for pulse counter and pulse output.
• Power the transmitter
• Reverse flow
• Enable Reverse Flow function
• Electronics failure
• Verify transmitter operation with an 8714D Calibration Standard
• Replace the electronics stack
• Pulse output incorrectly
configured
• Review configuration and correct as necessary
Error Messages on LOI
• Many possible causes
depending upon the message
• See Table 9-2 on page 139, Table 9-3 on page 141, Table 9-4 on
page 142 for the LOI messages
Discrete input does not
register
• Input signal does not provide
enough counts
• Verify the discrete input provided meets the requirements in Section
3.4.3 Connect discrete input
Pulse output at zero,
regardless of flow
Troubleshooting
147
Reference Manual
Section 9: Troubleshooting
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table 9-7. Common Magmeter Issue (continued)
Symptom
Reading does not
appear to be within
rated accuracy
148
Potential cause
Corrective action
• Transmitter, control system, or
other receiving device not
configured properly
• Check all configuration variables for the transmitter, sensor,
communicator, and/or control system
• Check these other transmitter settings:
•Sensor calibration number
•Units
•Line size
• Electrode Coating
• Enable Coated Electrode Detection diagnostic
• Use bullet-nose electrodes
• Downsize sensor to increase flow rate above 3 ft/s
• Periodically clean sensor
• Gas/air in line
• Move the sensor to another location in the process line to ensure that it
is full under all conditions
• Moisture problem
• Perform the sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 154
• Insufficient
upstream/downstream pipe
diameter
• Move sensor to a new location with 5 pipe diameters upstream and 2
pipe diameters downstream if possible
• Cables for multiple magmeters
run through same conduit
• Use dedicated conduit run for each sensor and transmitter
• Improper wiring
• If electrode shield and electrode signal wires are switched, flow
indication will be about half of what is expected. Check wiring diagrams.
• Flow rate is below 1 ft/s
(specification issue)
• See accuracy specification for specific transmitter and sensor
• Auto zero was not performed
when the coil drive frequency
was changed from 5 Hz to 37
Hz
• Set the coil drive frequency to 37 Hz, verify the sensor is full, verify there
is no flow, and perform the auto zero function
• Sensor failure–shorted
electrode
• Perform the sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 154
• Sensor failure–shorted or open
coil
• Perform the sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 154
• Transmitter failure
• Verify transmitter operation with an 8714 Calibration Standard or
replace the electronics board
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
Section 9: Troubleshooting
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table 9-7. Common Magmeter Issue (continued)
Symptom
Noisy Process
Meter output is
unstable
Troubleshooting
Potential cause
Corrective action
• Chemical additives upstream
of magnetic flowmeter
• See Troubleshooting high process noise on page 144
• Move injection point downstream of magnetic flowmeter, or move
magnetic flowmeter
• Sludge flows–mining/coal/
sand/slurries (other slurries
with
hard particles)
• Decrease flow rate below 10 ft/s
• Styrofoam or other insulating
particles in process
• See Troubleshooting high process noise on page 144
• Consult factory
• Electrode coating
• Enable Coated Electrode Detection diagnostic
• Use a smaller sensor to increase flow rate above 3 ft/s
• Periodically clean sensor
• Gas/air in line
• Move the sensor to another location in the process line to ensure that it
is full under all conditions
• Low conductivity fluids (below
10 microsiemens/cm)
• Trim electrode and coil wires – see Cable preparation on page 27
• Keep flow rate below 3 ft/s
• Integral mount transmitter
• Use component cable - see Table 2-10 on page 25
• Medium to low conductivity
fluids (10–25
microsiemens/cm) combined
with cable vibration or 60 Hz
interference
• Eliminate cable vibration
• Move cable to lower vibration run
• Tie down cable mechanically
• Use an integral mount
• Trim electrode and coil wires - see Cable preparation on page 27
• Route cable line away from other equipment
powered by 60 Hz
• Use component cable - see Table 2-10 on page 25
• Electrode incompatibility
• Check the Technical Data Sheet, Magnetic Flowmeter Material Selection
Guide (document number 00816-0100-3033), for chemical
compatibility with electrode material
• Improper grounding
• Check ground wiring – see Process reference connection on page 19 for
wiring and grounding procedures
• High local magnetic or electric
fields
• Move magnetic flowmeter (20–25 ft away is usually acceptable)
• Control loop improperly tuned
• Check control loop tuning
• Sticky valve (look for periodic
oscillation of meter output)
• Service valve
• Sensor failure
• Perform the sensor tests
(See Table 9-8 on page 154)
149
Section 9: Troubleshooting
9.6
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Sensor troubleshooting
This section describes manual tests that can be performed on the sensor to verify the health of
individual components. The tests will require the use of a digital multimeter capable of
measuring conductance in nanosiemens and an LCR meter. A sensor circuit diagram is shown in
Figure 9-1. The tests described below will check for continuity or isolation of the internal
components of the sensor.
Figure 9-1. Sensor Circuit Diagram (Simplified)
150
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
9.6.1
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
Sensor adapter
The sensor adapter is the part of the sensor that provides the internal connection feed-through
wiring from the internal sensor components to the socket module connections. The top of the
adapter has ten pins - four pins for the coils, four pins for the electrodes, and two pins for the
process reference. Each connection point has two pins associated for redundant continuity. See
Figure 9-2.
The best location for testing the sensor components is taking measurements directly on the
feed-through pins. Direct measurement on the pins eliminates the possibility of an erroneous
measurement caused by a bad socket module or remote wiring. The figure below shows the
feed-through pin connections as they relate to the terminal connections described in the tests.
Figure 9-2. Sensor Adapter Feed-through Pins
9.6.2
Socket module
The socket module connects the sensor adapter to the transmitter. There are two versions of
the socket module - one for integral mount transmitters and one for remote mount
transmitters. The socket module is a replaceable component. If test measurements taken
through the socket module show a failure, remove the socket module and confirm
measurements directly on the feed-through pins of the sensor adapter. To remove the socket
module, refer to Section 8: Maintenance.
Troubleshooting
151
Section 9: Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Integral
Figure 9-3 shows the integral mount socket module.
Figure 9-3. Integral Mount Socket Module
Remote
Figure 9-4 shows the remote mount socket module.
Figure 9-4. Remote Mount Socket Module
152
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
9.6.3
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
Installed sensor tests
If a problem with an installed sensor is identified, refer to Table 9-8 on page 154 to assist in troubleshooting the sensor. Disconnect or turn off power to the transmitter before performing any
of the sensor tests. Always check the operation of test equipment before each test.
If possible, take all readings from feed-through pins in the sensor adapter. If the pins in the
sensor adapter are inaccessible, take measurements at the sensor terminal block or through
remote cabling as close to the sensor as possible. Readings taken through remote cabling that is
more than 100 feet (30 meters) in length may provide incorrect or inconclusive information and
should be avoided. To test the sensor, a multimeter capable of measuring conductance in
nanosiemens is preferred.
Conductance is the reciprocal of resistance.
Or:
Troubleshooting
153
Reference Manual
Section 9: Troubleshooting
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
The expected values in the test below assume the measurements have been taken directly at
the pins.
Table 9-8. Sensor Tests and Expected Values
Sensor
location
Required
equipment
Measuring
at
connections
A. Sensor coil
Installed or
uninstalled
Multimeter
1 and 2 = R
2  R  18
• Open or
shorted coil
• Remove and
replace sensor
B. Shields to
case
Installed or
uninstalled
Multimeter
17 and 3
  0.3
• Moisture in
terminal block
• Leaky
electrode
• Process behind
liner
• Clean terminal
block
• Remove sensor
• Process behind
liner
• Leaky
electrode
• Moisture in
terminal block
• Remove sensor
and dry
• Clean terminal
block
• Confirm with
sensor coil test
• Unstable R1 or
R2 values
confirm coated
electrode
• Shorted
electrode
• Electrode not
in contact with
process
• Empty pipe
• Low
conductivity
• Leaky
electrode
• Process
reference
ground not
connected
properly
• Remove coating
from sensor wall
• Use bullet-nose
electrodes
• Repeat
measurement
• Remove sensor
and complete
tests in Table 9-9
• Connect process
reference
ground per 2.11
Process
reference
connection
• See Test D
above
• See Test D above
Test
Expected value
3 and case
ground
17 and case
ground
C. Coil to coil
shield
Installed or
uninstalled
Multimeter
1 and 3
 (< 1nS)
 (< 1nS)
2 and 3
D. Electrode
to
electrode
shield
Installed
E. Electrode
to
Electrode
Installed
154
LCR (Set to
Resistance
and 120 Hz)
18 and 17 = R1
19 and 17 = R2
LCR (set to
resistance and
120 Hz)
18 and 19
R1 and R2 should be
stable
R 1 – R 2  300
Should be stable and
same relative magnitude
of R1 and R2 from Test D
Potential
issue
Corrective
action
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
Section 9: Troubleshooting
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
9.6.4
August 2015
Uninstalled sensor tests
Sensor troubleshooting can also be performed on an uninstalled sensor. If test results from
installed sensor tests are inconclusive, the next step is remove the sensor and perform the tests
outlined in Table 9-9. Take measurements from the feed-through pins and directly on the
electrode head inside the sensor. The measurement electrodes, 18 and 19, are on opposite
sides in the inside diameter of the sensor. If applicable, the third process reference electrode is
between the two measurement electrodes.
The expected values in the test below assume the measurements have been taken directly at
the pins.
Table 9-9. Uninstalled Sensor Tests and Expected Values
Test
Sensor
location
Required
equipment
Measuring at
connections
Expected
value
Potential issue
Corrective action
(1)
1
• Shorted
electrode
• Open electrode
• Coated
electrode
• Replace sensor
• Remove coating
from sensor wall
A. Terminal to
front electrode
Uninstalled
Multimeter
18 and electrode 18
B. Terminal to
back electrode
Uninstalled
Multimeter
19 and electrode 19 (1)
1
• Shorted
electrode
• Open electrode
• Coated
electrode
• Replace sensor
• Remove coating
from sensor wall
C. Terminal to
reference
electrode
Uninstalled
Multimeter
17 and process
reference electrode (2)
 0.3
• Shorted
electrode
• Open electrode
• Coated
electrode
• Replace sensor
• Remove coating
from sensor wall
D. Terminal to
case ground
Uninstalled
Multimeter
17 and safety ground
 0.3
• Moisture in
terminal block
• Leaky electrode
• Process behind
liner
• Clean terminal
block
• Replace terminal
block
• Replace sensor
E. Electrode to
electrode
shield
Uninstalled
Multimeter
18 and 17

(<1 nS)
• Shorted
electrode
• Leaky electrode
• Moisture in
terminal block
• Replace sensor
• Clean terminal
block
• Replace terminal
block
19 and 17

(<1 nS)
• Shorted
electrode
• Leaky electrode
• Moisture in
terminal block
• Replace sensor
• Clean terminal
block
• Replace terminal
block
17 and 1

(<1 nS)
• Process in coil
housing
• Moisture in
terminal block
• Replace sensor
• Clean terminal
block
• Replace terminal
block
F. Electrode
shield to coil
Uninstalled
Multimeter
(1) When the connection head is in the vertical upright position and the flow arrow (see Figure 2-4 on page 10) on the connection head flange points to the
right, the front of the meter will be facing towards you. Electrode 18 is on the front of the meter. If you cannot determine the front of the meter, measure
both electrodes. One electrode should result in an open reading, while the other electrode should be less than 1 ohm.
(2) Only valid if the sensor has a process reference electrode.
Troubleshooting
155
Reference Manual
Section 9: Troubleshooting
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
9.7
Technical support
Email addresses:
Worldwide: [email protected]
Asia-Pacific: [email protected]
Middle East and Africa: [email protected]
North and South America
Europe and Middle East
Asia Pacific
United States
800-522-6277
U.K.
0870 240 1978
Australia
800 158 727
Canada
+1 303-527-5200
The Netherlands
+31 (0) 318 495 555
New Zealand
099 128 804
Mexico
+41 (0) 41 7686 111
France
0800 917 901
India
800 440 1468
Argentina
+54 11 4837 7000
Germany
0800 182 5347
Pakistan
888 550 2682
Brazil
+55 15 3238 3677
Italy
8008 77334
China
+86 21 2892 9000
Venezuela
+58 26 1731 3446
Central & Eastern
+41 (0) 41 7686 111
Japan
+81 3 5769 6803
Russia/CIS
+7 495 981 9811
South Korea
+82 2 3438 4600
Egypt
0800 000 0015
Singapore
+65 6 777 8211
Oman
800 70101
Thailand
001 800 441 6426
Qatar
431 0044
Malaysia
800 814 008
Kuwait
663 299 01
South Africa
800 991 390
Saudi Arabia
800 844 9564
UAE
800 0444 0684
9.8
Service
To expedite the return process outside the United States, contact the nearest Rosemount representative.
Within the United States and Canada, call the North American Response Center using the
800-654-RSMT (7768) toll-free number. The Response Center, available 24 hours a day, will
assist you with any needed information or materials.
The center will ask for product, model, and serial numbers and will provide a Return Material
Authorization (RMA) number. The center will also ask for the name of the process material to
which the product was last exposed.
Mishandling products exposed to a hazardous substance may result in death or serious injury. If
the product being returned was exposed to a hazardous substance as defined by OSHA, a copy
of the required Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each hazardous substance identified must
be included with the returned goods.
The North American Response Center will detail the additional information and procedures
necessary to return goods exposed to hazardous substances.
156
Troubleshooting
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Appendix A
Specifications and Reference
Data
Rosemount 8732EM Transmitter specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rosemount 8705-M Flanged Sensor specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rosemount 8711-M/L Wafer Sensor specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rosemount 8721 Hygienic (Sanitary) Sensor specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 157
page 168
page 174
page 178
A.1
Rosemount 8732EM Transmitter specifications
A.1.1
Functional specifications
Sensor compatibility
Compatible with Rosemount 8705, 8711, and 8721 sensors. Compatible with AC and DC
powered sensors of other manufacturers.
Transmitter coil drive current
500mA
Flow rate range
Capable of processing signals from fluids that are traveling between 0.04 and 39 ft/s (0.01 to 12
m/s) for both forward and reverse flow in all sensor sizes. Full scale continuously adjustable
between –39 and 39 ft/s (–12 to 12 m/s).
Conductivity limits
Process liquid must have a conductivity of 5 microSiemens/cm (5 micromhos/cm) or greater.
Power supply
90 - 250VAC, 50/60Hz or 12 - 42VDC
Specifications and Reference Data
157
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Line power fuses
90-250VAC systems
1A, 250V, I2t  1.5 A2s Rating, Fast Acting
Bussman AGC-1, Littelfuse 31201.5HXP
12-42VDC systems
3 Amp, 250V, I2t  14 A2s Rating, Fast Acting
Bel Fuse 3AG 3-R, Littelfuse 312003P, Schurter 0034.5135
Power consumption
15W maximum - DC
40VA maximum - AC
Switch-on current
AC: Maximum 35.7A (< 5ms) at 250VAC
DC: Maximum 42A (< 5ms) at 42VDC
AC power supply requirements
Units powered by 90 - 250VAC have the following power requirements.
Figure A-1. AC Current Requirements
158
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Figure A-2. Apparent Power
DC supply current requirements
Units powered by 12VDC power supply may draw up to 1.2A of current steady state.
Figure A-3. DC Current Requirements
Ambient temperature limits
Operating
–40 to 140 °F (–40 to 60 °C) without local operator interface
–4 to 140 °F (–20 to 60 °C) with local operator interface
The Local Operator Interface (LOI) will not display at temperatures below -20°C
Specifications and Reference Data
159
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Storage
–40 to 185 °F (–40 to 85 °C) without local operator interface
–22 to 176 °F (–30 to 80 °C) with local operator interface(1)
Humidity limits
0–95% RH to 140 °F (60 °C)
Altitude
2000 meters maximum
Enclosure rating
Type 4X, IEC 60529, IP66 (transmitter)
Transient protection rating
Built in transient protection that conforms to:
IEC 61000-4-4 for burst currents
IEC 61000-4-5 for surge currents.
IEC 611185-2.2000, Class 3 up to 2kV and up to 2kA protection.
Turn-on time
Five minutes to rated accuracy from power up
Five seconds from power interruption
Start-up time
50ms from zero flow
Low Flow cut-off
Adjustable between 0.01 and 38.37 ft/s (0.003 and 11.7 m/s). Below selected value, output is
driven to the zero flow rate signal level.
Overrange capability
Signal output will remain linear until 110% of upper range value or 44 ft/s (13 m/s). The signal
output will remain constant above these values. Out of range message displayed on LOI and the
Field Communicator.
Damping
Adjustable between 0 and 256 seconds
160
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
A.1.2
August 2015
Advanced diagnostics capabilities
Basic
Self test
Transmitter faults
Analog output test
Pulse output test
Tunable empty pipe
Reverse flow
Coil circuit fault
Electronics temperature
Process diagnostics (DA1)
Ground/wiring fault
High process noise
Electrode coating diagnostic
Smart meter verification (DA2)
Smart Meter Verification (continuous or on-demand)
4-20mA loop verification
A.1.3
Output signals
Analog output adjustment1
4–20mA, switch-selectable as internally or externally powered.
Analog loop load limitations
Internally powered 24VDC max, 500 ohms max loop resistance
Externally powered 10.8 - 30VDC max.
Loop resistance is determined by the voltage level of the external power supply at the
transmitter terminals.
1.
For transmitters with intrinsically safe outputs (option code B), power must be supplied externally.
Specifications and Reference Data
161
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Figure A-4. Analog Loop Load Limitations
Load (ohms)
600
Operating
Region
0
30
10.8
Power Supply (Volts)
Rmax =
Vps =
Rmax =
31.25 (Vps – 10.8)
Power Supply Voltage (Volts)
Maximum Loop Resistance (ohms)
The analog output is automatically scaled to provide 4mA at lower range value and 20mA at
upper range value. Full scale continuously adjustable between -39 and 39 ft/s (-12 to 12 m/sec),
1 ft/s (0.3 m/s) minimum span.
HART® Communications is a digital flow signal. The digital signal is superimposed on the 4–
20mA signal and is available for the control system interface. A minimum of 250ohms loop
resistance is required for HART communications.
Scalable pulse frequency adjustment12
0-10,000Hz, switch-selectable as internally or externally powered. Pulse value can be set to
equal desired volume in selected engineering units. Pulse width adjustable from 0.1 to 650 ms.
Internally powered: Outputs up to 12VDC
Externally powered: Input 5 - 28VDC
Output testing
Analog output test3
Transmitter may be commanded to supply a specified current between 3.5 and 23mA.
Pulse output test4
Transmitter may be commanded to supply a specified frequency between 1 and 10,000Hz.
Optional discrete output function (AX option)
Externally powered at 5 - 28VDC, 240mA max, solid state switch closure to indicate either:
Reverse flow
Activates switch closure output when reverse flow is detected.
1.
2.
3.
4.
162
For transmitters with intrinsically safe outputs (option code B), power must be supplied externally.
For transmitters with intrinsically safe outputs (option code B), frequency range is limited to 0-5000Hz.
For transmitters with intrinsically safe outputs (option code B), power must be supplied externally.
For transmitters with intrinsically safe outputs (option code B), power must be supplied externally.
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Zero flow
Activates switch closure output when flow goes to 0 ft/s or below low flow cutoff.
Empty pipe
Activates switch closure output when an empty pipe condition is detected.
Transmitter faults
Activates switch closure output when a transmitter fault is detected.
Flow limit 1, Flow limit 2
Activates switch closure output when the transmitter measures a flow rate that meets the
conditions established for this alert. There are two independent flow limit alerts that can be
configured as discrete outputs.
Totalizer limit
Activates switch closure output when the transmitter measures a total flow that meets the
conditions established for this alert.
Diagnostic status
Activates switch closure output when the transmitter detects a condition that meets the
configured criteria of this output.
Optional discrete input function (AX option)
Externally powered at 5 - 28VDC, 1.4 - 20mA to activate switch closure to indicate either:
Net total reset
Resets the net totalizer value to zero.
Positive zero return (PZR)
Forces outputs of the transmitter to zero flow.
Security lockout
Security lockout switch on the electronics board can be set to deactivate all LOI and HART-based
communicator functions to protect configuration variables from unwanted or accidental
change.
LOI lockout
The display can be manually locked to prevent unintentional configuration changes. The display
lock can be activated through a HART® communication device, or by holding the UP arrow for 3
seconds and then following the on-screen instructions. When the display lock is activated, a lock
symbol will appear in the lower right hand corner of the display. To deactivate the display lock,
hold the UP arrow for 3 seconds and follow the on-screen instructions.
Specifications and Reference Data
163
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Display auto lock can be configured from the LOI with the following settings: OFF, 1 Minute, or
10 Minutes
A.1.4
Sensor compensation
Rosemount sensors are calibrated in a flow lab at the factory and are assigned a calibration
number. The calibration number must be entered into the transmitter, enabling interchangeability of sensors without calculations or a compromise in standard accuracy.
8732EM transmitters and other manufacturers’ sensors can be calibrated at known process
conditions or at the Rosemount NIST-Traceable Flow Facility. Transmitters calibrated on site
require a two-step procedure to match a known flow rate. This procedure can be found in the
operations manual.
A.1.5
Performance specifications
System specifications are given using the frequency output and with the unit at reference
conditions.
Accuracy
Includes the combined effects of linearity, hysteresis, repeatability, and calibration uncertainty.
Rosemount 8705-M sensor
Standard system accuracy is ±0.25% of rate ±1.0 mm/sec from 0.04 to 6 ft/s (0.01 to 2 m/s);
above 6 ft/s (2 m/s), the system has an accuracy of ±0.25% of rate ±1.5 mm/sec.
Optional high accuracy is ±0.15% of rate ±1.0 mm/sec from 0.04 to 13 ft/s (0.01 to 4 m/s);
above 13 ft/s (4 m/s), the system has an accuracy of ±0.18% of rate.1
2.5
% of Rate
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.25%
0.15%
0.5
0
0
3
(1)
6
(2)
13
(4)
20
(6)
27
(8)
33
(10)
40
(12)
Velocity in ft/s (m/s)
Rosemount 8711-M/L sensor
Standard system accuracy is ±0.25% of rate ±2.0 mm/sec from 0.04 to 39 ft/s (0.01 to 12 m/s).
Optional high accuracy is ±0.15% of rate ±1.0 mm/sec from 0.04 to 13 ft/s (0.01 to 4 m/s);
above 13 ft/s (4 m/s), the system has an accuracy of ±0.18% of rate.
1.
164
For Sensor sizes greater than 12 in. (300 mm) the high accuracy is ±0.25% of rate from 3 to 39 ft/sec (1 to 12 m/sec).
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
2.5
% of Rate
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.25%
0.15%
0.5
0
0
3
(1)
6
(2)
13
(4)
20
(6)
27
(8)
33
(10)
40
(12)
Velocity in ft/s (m/s)
Rosemount 8721 sensor
Standard system accuracy is ±0.5% of rate from 1 to 39 ft/s (0.3 to 12 m/s); between 0.04 and
1.0 ft/s (0.01 and 0.3 m/s), the system has an accuracy of ±0.005 ft/s (0.0015 m/s).
Optional high accuracy is ±0.25% of rate from 3 to 39 ft/s (1 to 12 m/s).
2.5
% of Rate
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.25%
0.5%
0.5
0
0
3
(1)
6
(2)
13
(4)
20
(6)
27
(8)
33
(10)
40
(12)
Velocity in ft/s (m/s)
Specifications and Reference Data
165
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Other manufacturers’ sensors
When calibrated in the Rosemount Flow Facility, system accuracies as good as 0.5% of rate can
be attained.
There is no accuracy specification for other manufacturers’ sensors calibrated in the process
line.
A.1.6
Analog output effects
Analog output has the same accuracy as frequency output plus an additional ±4A at room
temperature.
Repeatability
±0.1% of reading
Response time (Analog Output)
20 ms max response time to step change in input
Stability
±0.1% of rate over six months
Ambient temperature effect
±0.25% change over operating temperature range
A.1.7
Physical specifications
Materials of construction
Standard housing
Low copper aluminum
Type 4X and IEC 60529 IP66
Paint
Polyurethane coat (1.3 to 5 mils thick)
Optional housing
316/316L unpainted, option code SH
Type 4X and IEC 60529 IP66
Cover gasket
Buna-N
166
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Electrical connections
Conduit entries: 1/2 inch NPT or M20 standard.
Terminal block screws: 6-32 (No. 6) suitable for up to 14 AWG wire.
Safety grounding screws: external stainless assembly, M5; internal 8-32 (No. 8)
Vibration rating
3G per IEC 61298
Dimensions
See Product Data Sheet.
Weight
Aluminum - approximately 7 lbs. (3.2 kg).
316 stainless steel - approximately 23 lbs. (10.5 kg).
Add 1 pound (0.5 kg) for display option code M4 or M5.
Specifications and Reference Data
167
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
A.2
Rosemount 8705-M Flanged Sensor specifications
A.2.1
Functional specifications
Service
Conductive liquids and slurries
Line sizes
/2–in. to 36-in. (15 mm to 900 mm) for Rosemount 8705
1
Sensor coil resistance
7 - 16 
Interchangeability
Rosemount 8705-M sensors are interchangeable with 8732EM transmitters. System accuracy is
maintained regardless of line size or optional features. Each sensor nameplate has a sixteen-digit
calibration number that can be entered into a transmitter through the Local Operator Interface
(LOI) or the Field Communicator.
Upper range limit
39.37 ft/s (12 m/s)
Process temperature limits
PTFE lining
–20 to 350 °F (–29 to 177 °C)
ETFE lining
–20 to 300 °F (–29 to 149 °C)
PFA lining
-20 to 350 °F (-29 to 177 °C)
168
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Polyurethane lining
0 to 140 °F (–18 to 60 °C)
Neoprene lining
0 to 176 °F (–18 to 80 °C)
Linatex lining
0 to 158 °F (–18 to 70 °C)
Adiprene lining
0 to 200 °F (–18 to 93 °C)
Ambient temperature limits
–20 to 140 °F (–29 to 60 °C)
Pressure limits
See Table A-1, Table A-2 and Table A-3
Vacuum limits
PTFE lining
Full vacuum to 350 °F (177 °C) through 4-in. (100 mm) line sizes. Consult factory for vacuum
applications with line sizes of 6 inches (150 mm) or larger.
All other standard sensor lining materials
Full vacuum to maximum material temperature limits for all available line sizes.
Submergence protection (IP68)
The remote mount 8705-M sensor is rated IP68 for submergence to a depth of 33 ft. (10 m) for a
period of 48 hours. IP68 rating requires the transmitter must be remote mount. Installer must
use IP68 approved cable glands, conduit connections, and/or conduit plugs. For more details on
proper installation techniques for IP68 submersible application, reference Rosemount Technical
Document 00840-0100-4750 available on www.rosemount.com.
Conductivity limits
Process liquid must have a minimum conductivity of 5 microSiemens/cm (5 micromhos/cm) or
greater.
Specifications and Reference Data
169
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table A-1. Temperature vs. Pressure Limits1
Sensor temperature vs. pressure limits for ASME B16.5 class flanges (1/2-in. to 36-in. line
sizes)2
Pressure
Flange material
Flange rating
@ -20 to 100 °F
(-29 to 38 °C)
@ 200 °F
(93 °C)
@ 300 °F
(149 °C)
@ 350 °F
(177 °C)
Class 150
285 psi
260 psi
230 psi
215 psi
Class 300
740 psi
675 psi
655 psi
645 psi
Carbon Steel
304 Stainless
Steel
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3
Class 600
1000 psi
800 psi
700 psi
650 psi
Class 6004
1480 psi
1350 psi
1315 psi
1292 psi
Class 900
2220 psi
2025 psi
1970 psi
1935 psi
Class 1500
3705 psi
3375 psi
3280 psi
3225 psi
Class 2500
6170 psi
5625 psi
5470 psi
5375 psi
Class 150
275 psi
235 psi
205 psi
190 psi
Class 300
720 psi
600 psi
530 psi
500 psi
Class 600 5
1000 psi
800 psi
700 psi
650 psi
6
Class 600
1440 psi
1200 psi
1055 psi
997 psi
Class 900
2160 psi
1800 psi
1585 psi
1497 psi
Class 1500
3600 psi
3000 psi
2640 psi
2495 psi
Class 2500
6000 psi
5000 psi
4400 psi
4160 psi
Liner temperature limits must also be considered.
30-in. and 36-in. AWWA C207 Class D rated to 150 psi at atmospheric temperature.
Option Code C6.
Option Code C7.
Option Code S6.
Option Code S7.
1
Table A-2. Temperature vs. Pressure Limits
Sensor temperature vs. pressure limits for AS2129 Table D and E flanges (4-in. to 24-in. line sizes)
Pressure
Flange material
Carbon Steel
1.
Flange rating
@ -29 to 50 °C
(-20 to 122 °F)
@ 100 °C
(212 °F)
@ 150 °C
(302 °F)
@ 200 °C
(392 °F)
D
101.6 psi
101.6 psi
101.6 psi
94.3 psi
E
203.1 psi
203.1 psi
203.1 psi
188.6 psi
Liner temperature limits must also be considered.
Table A-3. Temperature vs. Pressure Limits1
Sensor temperature vs. pressure limits for EN 1092-1 flanges (15 mm to 600 mm line sizes)
Pressure
Flange material
Carbon Steel
170
Flange rating
@ -29 to 50 °C
(-20 to 122 °F)
@ 100 °C
(212 °F)
@ 150°C
(302 °F)
@ 175°C
(347 °F)
PN 10
10 bar
10 bar
9.7 bar
9.5 bar
PN 16
16 bar
16 bar
15.6 bar
15.3 bar
PN 25
25 bar
25 bar
24.4 bar
24.0 bar
PN 40
40 bar
40 bar
39.1 bar
38.5 bar
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Table A-3. Temperature vs. Pressure Limits1 (continued)
Sensor temperature vs. pressure limits for EN 1092-1 flanges (15 mm to 600 mm line sizes)
Pressure
Flange material
Flange rating
@ -29 to 50 °C
(-20 to 122 °F)
@ 100 °C
(212 °F)
@ 150°C
(302 °F)
@ 175°C
(347 °F)
PN 10
9.1 bar
7.5 bar
6.8 bar
6.5 bar
PN 16
14.7 bar
12.1 bar
11.0 bar
10.6 bar
PN 25
23 bar
18.9 bar
17.2 bar
16.6 bar
PN 40
36.8 bar
30.3 bar
27.5 bar
26.5 bar
304 Stainless Steel
1.
A.2.2
Liner temperature limits must also be considered.
Physical specifications
Non-wetted materials
Sensor pipe
Type 304/304L SST or Type 316/316L SST
Flanges
Carbon steel, Type 304/304L SST, or Type 316/316L SST
Coil housing
Rolled carbon steel
Paint
Polyurethane coat (1.3 to 5 mils thick)
Optional coil housing
316/316L unpainted, option code SH
Process wetted materials
Lining
PFA, PTFE, ETFE, Polyurethane, Neoprene, Linatex,
Thick PFA, Adiprene
Electrodes
316L SST, Nickel Alloy 276 (UNS N10276), Tantalum,
80% Platinum-20% Iridium, Titanium
Flat-faced flanges
Flat-faced flanges are manufactured with full-face liners. Available in Neoprene and Linatex only.
Specifications and Reference Data
171
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Process connections
ASME B16.5
/2-in. to 24-in. (Class 150, 300, 600)1
1
1-in. to 12-in. (Class 900)2
11/2-in. to 12-in. (Class 1500)2
11/2-in. to 6-in. (Class 2500)2
ASME B16.47
30-in. to 36-in. (Class 150)
30-in. to 36-in. (Class 300)
AWWA C207 Class D
30-in. and 36-in.
EN 1092-1
200 mm to 900mm (8-in. to 36-in.) PN10
100 mm to 900mm (4 -in. to 36-in.) PN16
200 mm to 900mm (8-in. to 36-in.) PN 25
15 mm to 900mm (1/2-in. to 36-in.) PN40
AS2129
15 mm to 900 mm (1/2-in. to 36-in.) Table D and E
AS4087
50 mm to 600 mm (2-in. to 24-in.) PN16, PN21, PN35
JIS B2220
15 mm to 200 mm (1/2-in. to 8-in.) 10K, 20K, 40K
Electrical connections
Conduit entries: 1/2 inch NPT or M20 standard.
Terminal block screws: 6-32 (No. 6) suitable for up to 14 AWG wire.
Safety grounding screws: external stainless assembly, M5; internal 8-32 (No. 8)
1.
2.
172
For PTFE and ETFE, maximum working pressure is derated to 1000 psig.
For Class 900 and higher flange ratings,.liner selection is limited to resilient liners.
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Process reference electrode (optional)
A process reference electrode can be installed similarly to the measurement electrodes through
the sensor lining on 8705 sensors. It will be made of the same material as the measurement
electrodes.
Grounding rings (optional)
Grounding rings can be installed between the flange and the sensor face on both ends of the
sensor. Single ground rings can be installed on either end of the sensor. They have an I.D. slightly
larger than the sensor I.D. and an external tab to attach ground wiring. Grounding rings are
available in 316L SST, Nickel Alloy 276 (UNS N10276), titanium, and tantalum. See Product Data
Sheet.
Lining protectors (optional)
Lining protectors can be installed between the flange and the sensor face on both ends of the
sensor. The leading edge of lining material is protected by the lining protector; lining protectors
cannot be removed once they are installed. Lining protectors are available in 316L SST, Nickel
Alloy 276 (UNS N10276), and titanium. See Product Data Sheet.
Dimensions
See the Product Data Sheet.
Weight
See the Product Data Sheet.
Specifications and Reference Data
173
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
A.3
Rosemount 8711-M/L Wafer Sensor specifications
A.3.1
Functional specifications
Service
Conductive liquids and slurries
Line sizes
1.5-in. to 8-in. (4 mm to 200 mm)
Sensor coil resistance
10 - 18 
Interchangeability
Rosemount 8711-M/L sensors are interchangeable with 8732EM Transmitter. System accuracy
is maintained regardless of line size or optional features. Each sensor nameplate has a 16-digit
calibration number that can be entered into a transmitter through the Local Operator Interface
(LOI) or the Field Communicator.
Upper range limit
39.37 ft/s (12 m/s)
Process temperature limits
ETFE lining
-20 to 300 °F (–29 to 149 °C)
PTFE lining
-20 to 350 °F (-29 to 177 °C)
PFA Lining
-20 to 200 °F (-29 to 93 °C)
174
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Ambient temperature limits
–20 to 140 °F (–29 to 60 °C)
Maximum safe working pressure at 100 °F (38 °C)
ETFE lining
Full vacuum to 740 psi (5.1 MPa)
PTFE lining
Full vacuum through 4-in. (100 mm) line sizes. Consult factory for vacuum applications with line
sizes of 6-in. (1450 mm) or larger.
PFA lining
Full vacuum to 285 psi (1.96 MPa)
Submergence protection (IP68)
The remote mount 8711-M/L sensor is rated IP68 for submergence to a depth of 33 ft. (10 m) for
a period of 48 hours. IP68 rating requires the transmitter must be remote mount. Installer must
use IP68 approved cable glands, conduit connections, and/or conduit plugs. For more details on
proper installation techniques for IP68 submersible application, reference Rosemount Technical
Document 00840-0100-4750 available on www.rosemount.com.
Conductivity limits
Process liquid must have a minimum conductivity of 5 microSiemens/cm (5 micromhos/cm) or
greater for 8711.
A.3.2
Physical specifications
Non-wetted materials
Sensor body
303 SST
CF3M or CF8M
Type 304/304L
Coil housing
Rolled carbon steel
Paint
Polyurethane coat (1.3 to 5 mils thick)
Specifications and Reference Data
175
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Process-wetted materials
Lining
ETFE, PTFE
Electrodes
316L SST, Nickel Alloy 276 (UNS N10276), Tantalum,
80% Platinum—20% Iridium, Titanium
Process connections
Mounts between these flange configurations
ASME B16.5: Class 150, 300
EN 1092-1: PN10, PN16, PN25, PN40
JIS B2220: 10K, 20K,
AS4087: PN16, PN21, PN35
Studs, nuts, and washers
MK2
ASME B16.5
Studs, full thread: CS, ASTM A193, Grade B7
Hex nuts: ASTM A194 Grade 2H;
Flat washers: CS, Type A, Series N, SAE per ANSI B18.2.1
All items clear, chromate zinc-plated
EN 1092-1
Studs, full thread: CS, ASTM A193, Grade B7
Hex nuts: ASTM A194 Grade 2H; DIN 934 H = D
Flat washers: CS, DIN 125
All items yellow zinc-plated
MK3
ASME B16.5
Studs, full thread: ASTM A193, Grade B8M Class 1
Hex nuts: ASTM A194 Grade 8M;
Flat washers: 316 SST, Type A, Series N, SAE per ANSI B18.2.1
176
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
EN 1092-1
Studs, full thread: ASTM A193, Grade B8M Class 1
Hex nuts: ASTM A194 Grade 8M; DIN 934 H = D
Flat washers: 316 SST, DIN 125
Electrical connections
Conduit entries: 1/2 inch NPT or M20 standard.
Terminal block screws: 6-32 (No. 6) suitable for up to 14 AWG wire.
Safety grounding screws: external stainless assembly, M5; internal 8-32 (No. 8)
Process reference electrode - (optional)
A process reference electrode can be installed similarly to the measurement electrodes through
the sensor lining. It will be made of the same material as the measurement electrodes.
Grounding rings - (optional)
Grounding rings can be installed between the flange and the sensor face on both ends of the
sensor. They have an I.D. slightly smaller than the sensor I.D. and an external tab to attach
ground wiring. Grounding rings are available in 316L SST, Nickel Alloy 276 (UNS N10276),
titanium, and tantalum. See Product Data Sheet.
Dimensions
See the Product Data Sheet.
Weight
See the Product Data Sheet.
Specifications and Reference Data
177
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
A.4
Rosemount 8721 Hygienic (Sanitary) Sensor
specifications
A.4.1
Functional specifications
Service
Conductive liquids and slurries
Line sizes
/2-in. to 4-in. (15 mm to100 mm)
1
Sensor coil resistance
5 -10
Interchangeability
The Rosemount 8721 sensors are interchangeable with Rosemount 8732EM Transmitters.
System accuracy is maintained regardless of line size or optional features.
Each sensor label has a 16 digit calibration number that can be entered into the transmitter
through the Local Operator Interface (LOI) or the Field Communicator.
Conductivity limits
Process liquid must have a minimum conductivity of 5 microSiemens/cm (5 micromhos/cm) or
greater. Excludes the effect of interconnecting cable length in remote mount transmitter
installations.
Flow rate range
Capable of processing signals from fluids that are traveling between 0.04 and 39 ft/s (0.01 to 12
m/s) for both forward and reverse flow in all sensor sizes. Full scale continuously adjustable
between –39 and 39 ft/s (–12 to 12 m/s).
178
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Sensor ambient temperature limits
14 to 140 °F (–15 to 60 °C)
Process temperature limits
PFA lining
-20 to 350 °F (-29 to 177 °C)
Table A-4. Pressure limits
Line size
Max working pressure
CE Mark max. working pressure
1
300 psi (20.7 bar)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
1 /2 (40)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
2 (50)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
21/2 (65)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
240 psi (16.5 bar)
3 (80)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
198 psi (13.7 bar)
4 (100)
210 psi (14.5 bar)
148 psi (10.2 bar)
/2 (15)
1 (25)
1
Vacuum limits
Full vacuum at maximum lining material temperature; consult factory.
Submergence protection (IP68)
The remote mount 8721 sensor is rated IP68 for submergence to a depth of 33 ft. (10 m) for a
period of 48 hours. IP68 rating requires the transmitter must be remote mount. Installer must
use IP68 approved cable glands, conduit connections, and/or conduit plugs. For more details on
proper installation techniques for IP68 submersible application, reference Rosemount Technical
Document 00840-0100-4750 available on www.rosemount.com.
A.4.2
Physical specifications
Mounting
Integrally mounted transmitters are factory-wired and do not require interconnecting cables.
The transmitter can rotate in 90° increments. Remote mounted transmitters require only a
single conduit connection to the sensor.
Non-wetted materials
Sensor
304 Stainless Steel (wrapper), 304 Stainless Steel (pipe)
Specifications and Reference Data
179
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Terminal junction box
Low copper aluminum
Optional: 304 Stainless Steel
Weight
Table A-5. 8721 Sensor weight
Line size Sensor only
008721-0350 Tri-Clamp fitting (each)
1
/2
4.84 lbs (2.20 kg)
0.58 lbs (0.263 kg)
1.0
4.52 lbs (2.05 kg)
0.68 lbs (0.309 kg)
1
1 /2
5.52 lbs (2.51 kg)
0.88 lbs (0.400 kg)
2.0
6.78 lbs (3.08 kg)
1.30 lbs (0.591 kg)
1
2 /2
8.79 lbs (4.00 kg)
1.66 lbs (0.727 kg)
3.0
13.26 lbs (6.03 kg)
2.22 lbs (1.01 kg)
4.0
21.04 lbs (9.56 kg)
3.28 lbs (1.49 kg)
Aluminum remote junction box
Approximately 1 lb. (0.45 kg)
Paint - Polyurethane (1.3 to 5 mils)
SST remote junction box
Approximately 2.5 lbs. (1.13 kg)
Unpainted
Process wetted materials (sensor)
Liner
PFA with Ra < 32in. (0.81 m)
Electrodes
316L SST with Ra < 15in. (0.38 m)
Nickel Alloy 276 (UNS N10276) with Ra < 15in. (0.38 m)
80% Platinum-20% Iridium with Ra < 15in. (0.38 m)
Process connections
The Rosemount 8721 sanitary sensor is designed using a standard IDF fitting as the basis for
providing a flexible, hygienic interface for a variety of process connections. The Rosemount
8721 Sensor has the threaded or “male” end of the IDF fitting on the ends of the base sensor.
The sensor can be directly connected with user supplied IDF fittings and gaskets. If other process
connections are needed, the IDF fittings and gaskets can be provided and welded directly into
the sanitary process tubing, or can be supplied with adapters to standard Tri-Clamp process
connections. All connections are PED compliant for group 2 fluids.
180
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Tri-Clamp Sanitary Coupling
IDF Sanitary Coupling (screw type)
IDF specification per BS4825 part 4
ANSI Weld Nipple
DIN 11850 Weld Nipple
DIN 11851 (Imperial and Metric)
DIN 11864-1 form A
DIN 11864-2 form A
SMS 1145
Cherry-Burrell I-Line
Process connection material
316L Stainless Steel with Ra < 32 in. (0.81m)
Optional electropolished surface finish with Ra < 15in. (0.38m)
Process connection gasket material
Silicone
EPDM
Viton
Electrical connections
Conduit entries: 1/2 inch NPT standard.
Terminal block screws: M3
Safety grounding screws: external stainless assembly, M5; internal 6-32 (No. 6)
Dimensions
See the Product Data Sheet.
Specifications and Reference Data
181
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
August 2015
182
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Approval Information
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Appendix B
B.1
August 2015
Approval Information
Product certifications
Approvals Document
July 24, 2015
08732-AP01, Rev AF
Rosemount 8700M Magnetic Flowmeter Platform
Order
Code
8732EM
Transm itter Rating
8705M and 8711M/L
Flow tube Rating
Region Agency
Certification
Num ber
Ordinary Locations *
Ordinary Location *
USA
EU
FM
3048793
N5
FM Non-Incendive
Class I Div 2; DIP
FM Non-Incendive w ith Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
Class I Div 2; DIP
USA
FM
3048793
K5
FM Explosion-Proof
Class I Div 1; DIP
FM Explosion-Proof w ith Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
Class I Div 1; DIP
USA
FM
3048793
N6
CSA Non-Incendive
Class I Div 2; DIP
CSA Non-Incendive w ith Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
Class I Div 2; DIP
USA &
Canada
CSA
70030489
KU
CSA Explosion-Proof
Class I Div 1; DIP
CSA Explosion-Proof w ith Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
Class I Div 1; DIP
USA
CSA
70030489
K6
CSA Flam eproof, Increased Safety, and Dust. CSA Increased Safety w ith Intrinsically Safe Electrodes and
Canada
Zone 0 & 1
Dust. Zone 0 & 1
CSA
***
ND
ATEX Dust
ATEX Dust
EU
DEKRA
14ATEX0071 X
N1
ATEX Non-Sparking
ATEX Dust
ATEX Non-Sparking w ith Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
ATEX Dust
EU
DEKRA
14ATEX0071 X
K1
ATEX Flam eproof w ith Increased Safety
ATEX Dust
ATEX Increased Safety w ith Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
ATEX Dust
EU
DEKRA
14ATEX0071 X
NF
IECEx Dust
IECEx Dust
Global
DEKRA
IECEx
DEK14.0031X
N7
IECEx Non-Sparking
IECEx Dust
IECEx Non-Sparking w ith Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
IECEx Dust
Global
DEKRA
IECEx
DEK14.0031X
K7
IECEx Flam eproof w ith Increased Safety
IECEx Dust
IECEx Increased Safety w ith Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
IECEx Dust
Global
DEKRA
IECEx
DEK14.0031X
N8
EAC Non-Sparking
EAC Dust
EAC Non-Sparking w ith Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
EAC Dust
Russia
**
***
***
K8
EAC Flam eproof w ith Increased Safety
EAC Dust
EAC Increased Safety w ith Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
EAC Dust
Russia
**
***
N2
INMETRO Non-Sparking
INMETRO Dust
INMETRO Non-Sparking w ith Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
INMETRO Dust
DEKRA Brazil
INMETRO
DEKRA
15.0007 X
K2
INMETRO Flam eproof w ith Increased Safety
INMETRO Dust
INMETRO Increased Safety w ith Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
INMETRO Dust
Brazil
DEKRA INMETRO
DEKRA
15.0007 X
N9
KOSHA Non-Sparking
KOSHA Dust
KOSHA Non-Sparking w ith Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
KOSHA Dust
Korea
***
***
K9
KOSHA Flam eproof w ith Increased Safety
KOSHA Dust
KOSHA Increased Safety w ith Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
KOSHA Dust
Korea
***
***
N3
NEPSI Non-Sparking
NEPSI Dust
NEPSI Non-Sparking w ith Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
NEPSI Dust
China
NEPSI
GYJ15.1180X
K3
NEPSI Flam eproof w ith Increased Safety
NEPSI Dust
NEPSI Increased Safety w ith Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
NEPSI Dust
China
NEPSI
GYJ15.1180X
KN
CCOE Flam eproof w ith Increased Safety
CCOE Increased Safety w ith Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
India
PESO
P354747/1
-
*
**
***
***
Com plies w ith only the local country product safety, electrom agnetic, pressure and other applicable regulations.
Cannot be used in a classified or zoned hazardous location environm ent. No ordering code required.
Custom s Union (Russia, Belarus and Kazakhstan)
Planned subm ittal or in process w ith Agency.
Approval Information
183
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Approval Information
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Approvals Document
July 24, 2015
08732-AP01, Rev AF
Approval Markings and Logos
Symbol
Marking or
Symbol
Name
Region
Meaning of Marking or Symbol
CE
European Union
Compliance with all applicable European
Union Directives.
ATEX
European Union
Compliance with Equipment and Protective
systems intended for use in Potentially
Explosive Atmospheres directive (ATEX)
(94/9/EC)
C-tick
Australia
Compliance with Australian applicable
electromagnetic compatibility standards
FM Approved
United States
Compliance with the applicable ANSI
standards.
CSA
US = United States
Indicates that the product was tested and has
met the applicable certification requirements
for the noted countries.
C = Canada
Eurasian
Conformity
(EAC)
Eurasian Customs Union
(Russia, Belarus and
Kazakhstan)
Compliance with all of the applicable technical
regulations of the EAC Customs Union
EAC
Hazardous
Location
Eurasian Customs Union
(Russia, Belarus and
Kazakhstan)
Compliance with Technical regulation, (TR CU
012/2011) – The safety of equipment for use
in explosive environments.
INMETRO
Brazil
Compliance with all of the applicable technical
regulations of Brazil.
NEPSI
China
Compliance with all of the applicable technical
regulations of China.
KCS
Korea
Compliance with all of the applicable technical
regulations of Korea.
Ordinary Location labels will be marked with CE, C-tick, FM, CSA and EAC logos.
184
Approval Information
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Approval Information
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Approvals Document
July 24, 2015
08732-AP01, Rev AF
European Directive Information
A copy of the EC Declaration of Conformity can be found at the end of the Quick Start Guide. The most recent
revision of the EC Declaration of Conformity can be found at www.rosemount.com.
Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) (2004/108/EC)
Transmitter and Flowtube: EN 61326-1: 2013
Transmitters with output code “B” require shielded cable for the 4-20mA output, with shield terminated at the
transmitter.
Low Voltage Directive (LVD) (2006/95/EC)
EN 61010-1: 2010
Ingress Protection Rating for dust and water per EN 60079-0 and EN 60529 – IP66/68 (The IP68 rating only
applies to the flowtube and the remote junction box when the transmitter is remotely mounted. The IP68 rating
does not apply to the transmitter. The IP68 rating is only valid at a depth of 10 meters for 48 hours)
European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) (97/23/EC)
PED Certification requires the “PD” option code.
CE marked models that are ordered without the “PD” option will be marked “Not Complaint to (97/23/EC)”
Mandatory CE-marking with notified body number 0575, for all flowtubes is located on the flowmeter label.
Category I assessed for conformity per module A procedures.
Categories II – III assessed for conformity per module H procedures.
QS Certificate of Assessment
EC No. 4741-2014-CE-HOU-DNV
Module H Conformity Assessment
8705 M Flanged Flowtubes
Line size 40mm to 900mm (1½-in to 36-in)
EN 1092-1 flanges and ASME B16.5 class 150 and ASME B16.5 Class 300 flanges.
Also available in ASME B16.5 Class 600 flanges in limited line sizes.
8711 Wafer Flowtubes
Line size 40mm to 200mm (1½-in to 8-in)
All other Rosemount Flowtubes – line sizes of 25mm (1-in) and less: Sound Engineering Practice (SEP).
Flowtubes that are SEP are outside the scope of PED and cannot be marked for compliance with PED.
Approval Information
185
Appendix B: Approval Information
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Approvals Document
July 24, 2015
08732-AP01, Rev AF
Certifications
Factory Mutual (FM)
Ordinary Location Certification for FM Approvals
As standard, the transmitter and flowtube have been examined and tested to determine that the design meets
basic electrical, mechanical, and fire protection requirements by FM Approvals, a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) as accredited by the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
8732EM Transmitter
Note: For Intrinsically Safe (IS) 4-20mA and Pulse Outputs on the 8732EM, output code “B” must be selected.
N5
Non-Incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD: T4
Dust-Ignition Proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups EFG: T5
-ƒ&”7D”ƒ&
Enclosure Type 4X, IP66
Install per drawing 08732-2062
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1. Units marked with “Warning: Electrostatic Charging Hazard” may either use non-conductive paint thicker
than 0.2 mm or non-metallic labeling. Precautions shall be taken to avoid ignition due to electrostatic
charge on the enclosure.
2. The intrinsically safe 4-20mA and pulse output cannot withstand the 500V isolation test due to integral
transient protection. This must be taken into consideration upon installation.
3. Conduit entries must be installed to maintain the enclosure ingress rating of IP66.
4. Unused conduit entries must use either used the Rosemount-supplied blanking plugs, or blanking plugs
certified in accordance with the protection type.
K5
Explosion-Proof for Class I Division 1, Groups CD: T6
Non-Incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD: T4
Dust-Ignition Proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups EFG: T5
-ƒ&”7D”ƒ&
Enclosure Type 4X, IP66
Install per drawing 08732-2062
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1. Units marked with “Warning: Electrostatic Charging Hazard” may either use non-conductive paint thicker
than 0.2 mm or non-metallic labeling. Precautions shall be taken to avoid ignition due to electrostatic
charge on the enclosure.
2. The intrinsically safe 4-20mA and pulse output cannot withstand the 500V isolation test due to integral
transient protection. This must be taken into consideration upon installation.
3. Conduit entries must be installed to maintain the enclosure ingress rating of IP66.
4. Unused conduit entries must use either used the Rosemount-supplied blanking plugs, or blanking plugs
certified in accordance with the protection type.
186
Approval Information
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Approval Information
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Approvals Document
July 24, 2015
08732-AP01, Rev AF
8705-M and 8711-M/L Flowtube
Note: When used in hazardous (classified) locations:
The 8705-M and 8711-M/L may only be used with a certified 8732EM transmitter.
N5
Non-Incendive with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
for Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD: T3…T5
Dust-Ignition Proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups EFG: T2…T5
-ƒ&”7D”ƒ&
Enclosure Type 4X, IP66/68 (IP68 remote mount only)
Install per drawing 08732-2062
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1. Units marked with “Warning: Electrostatic Charging Hazard” may either use non-conductive paint thicker
than 0.2 mm or non-metallic labeling. Precautions shall be taken to avoid ignition due to electrostatic
charge on the enclosure.
2. If used with flammable process fluid, the electrode circuit must be installed as intrinsically safe (Ex ia).
3. Conduit entries must be installed to maintain a minimum enclosure ingress rating of IP66.
4. Unused conduit entries must use either used the Rosemount-supplied blanking plugs, or blanking plugs
certified in accordance with the protection type.
K5
Explosion-Proof with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
for Class I Division 1, Groups CD: T3…T6
Non-Incendive with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
for Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD: T3…T5
Dust-Ignition Proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups EFG: T2…T5
-ƒ&”7D”ƒ&
Enclosure Type 4X, IP66/68 (IP68 remote mount only)
Install per drawing 08732-2062
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1. Units marked with “Warning: Electrostatic Charging Hazard” may either use non-conductive paint thicker
than 0.2 mm or non-metallic labeling. Precautions shall be taken to avoid ignition due to electrostatic
charge on the enclosure.
2. If used with flammable process fluid, or if installed in a Class I Division I area, the electrode circuit must
be installed as intrinsically safe (Ex ia).
3. Conduit entries must be installed to maintain a minimum enclosure ingress rating of IP66.
4. Unused conduit entries must use either used the Rosemount-supplied blanking plugs, or blanking plugs
certified in accordance with the protection type.
Approval Information
187
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Approval Information
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Approvals Document
July 24, 2015
08732-AP01, Rev AF
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
CLASS 2258 02 - PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT - For Hazardous Locations – To Canadian Requirements.
N6
N6
N6
Class I, Groups A, B, C and D (Intrinsically Safe Output and Electrode circuit)
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D (Non-Incendive)
Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F and G (Dust Ignition Proof)
Magnetic Flow Meter – Model 8732EM Transmitter with integral or remote mount to Model 8705M or Model
8711M/L Magnetic Flow Tubes. Enclosure Type 4X and IP 66 Rated.
For Remote Mount Configuration – Temperature Code T4 with an Ambient Operating Temperature Range: -40°C
чdĂчнϲϬΣ͕ǁŝƚŚŽƌǁŝƚŚŽƵƚ>ŵĞƚĞƌ͕ǁŝƚŚŽƌǁŝƚŚŽƵƚĚŝŐŝƚĂů/ͬKĂŶĚͬŽƌƉƵůƐĞŽƵƚƉƵƚƐǁŚĞŶŝŶƐƚĂůůĞĚƉĞƌ
Rosemount Drawing 08732-2061.
For Integral Mount Configuration – Ambient Operating Temperature Range: -29°C чdĂчнϲϬΣ. Temperature
Code T3-T6 dependent on line size of Flow Tubes for Process Temperature. The T-Code is defined as per
Rosemount Drawing 08705-00CS and 08732-00CS for ‘N6’ option or ‘KU’ option.
CLASS 2258 82 - PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT - For Hazardous Locations –To US Requirements
KU
N6, KU
N6, KU
N6, KU
Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D (Explosion Proof)
Class I, Groups A, B, C and D (Intrinsically Safe Output and Electrode circuit
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D (Non-Incendive)
Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F and G (Dust Ignition Proof)
Magnetic Flow Meter – Model 8732EM Transmitter with integral or remote mount to Model 8705M or Model
8711M/L Magnetic Flow Tubes. Enclosure Type 4X and IP 66 Rated.
For Remote Mount Configuration – Temperature Code T6 for Explosion Proof, T5 for Dust Ignition Proof, and T4
for Non-Incendive. Ambient Operating Temperature Range: -ϰϬΣчdĂчнϲϬΣ͕ǁŝƚŚŽƌǁŝƚŚŽƵƚ>ŵĞƚĞƌ͕ǁŝƚŚ
or without digital I/O and/or pulse outputs when installed per Rosemount Drawing 08732-2061.
For Integral Mount Configuration – Ambient Operating Temperature Range: -ϮϵΣч dĂчнϲϬΣ. Temperature
Code T3-T6 dependent on line size of Flow Tubes for Process Temperature. The T-Code is defined as per
Rosemount Drawing 08705-00CS and 08732-00CS for ‘N6’ option or ‘KU’ option.
Special Conditions of Safe Use:
1. For use with the appropriate 8705M and 8711M/L Flow tubes only.
2. When the 8732EM transmitter is integrally mounted to 8705M or 8711M/L Flow Tubes, the ambient
temperature ranges marked on each product need to be taken into consideration before installation.
The Ambient temperature range for 8732EM transmitter is -ϰϬΣчdĂчнϲϬΣĂŶĚƚŚĞĂŵďŝĞŶƚ
temperature range for 8705M or 8711M/L Flow Tubes is -ϮϵΣчdĂчнϲϬΣ͘ Therefore, the -29°C rating
of the flow tubes will limit the overall cold temperature range of the complete system unless other
approved temperature control methods are employed.
188
Approval Information
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Approval Information
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Rosemount 8700M Magnetic Flowmeter Platform
IEC EX & ATEX Approval Document
January 29, 2015,
08732-AP02, Rev AB
1. Equipment Markings – See section VI in the tables on the following pages
a. EC-Type Examination Certificate (ATEX): DEKRA 14ATEX0071_X
b. Certificate of Conformity (IEC Ex): IEC Ex DEK 14.0031X
2. Required Documentation:
a. 08732-2060 Installation Drawing Model 8732EM, 8705M, 8711-M/L ATEX/IEC Ex Hazardous (Ex)
Locations
b. 08732-1504 Installation Drawing, 8732EM Transmitter Wiring
3. Referenced Documentation:
a. 00825-0100-4444.pdf(Hart) & 00825-0400-4444(Modbus), Quick Installation Guide
b. 00809-0100-4444.pdf, Reference Manual
c. 08732-AP01, Approvals Document
4. The Required and Referenced Documents listed above address the following items:
a. Instructions for safety i.e.
i. Putting into service
ii. Use
iii. Assembling and dismantling
iv. Maintenance, overhaul and repair
v. Installation
vi. Adjustment
b. Where necessary, training instructions
c. Details which allow a decision to be made as to whether the equipment can be used safely in the
intended area under the expected operating conditions
d. Electrical parameters, maximum surface temperatures and other limit values
i. Electrical –
1. See document 08732-2060
2.
Rosemount 8732EM Flow Transmitter
Power input
90 - 250VAC, 0.45A, 40VA
12 - 42VDC, 1.2A, 15W
Pulsed circuit
Um
Internally powered (Active): Outputs up to 12VDC, 12.1mA,
73mW Externally powered (Passive): Input up to 28VDC,
100mA, 1W
Internally Powered (Active): Outputs up to 25mA, 24VDC,
600mW Externally Powered (Passive): Input up to 25mA,
30VDC, 750mW
Internally Powered (Active): Outputs up to 100mA, 3.3VDC,
100mW
250V
Coil excitation output
500mA, 40V max, 9W max
4-20mA output circuit
MODBUS
Rosemount 8705-M and 8711-M/L Flowtube(1)
Coil excitation input
500mA, 40V max,
20W max
Electrode circuit
5V, 200uA, 1mW
(1) Provided by the transmitter
Approval Information
189
Appendix B: Approval Information
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Rosemount 8700M Magnetic Flowmeter Platform
IEC EX & ATEX Approval Document
January 29, 2015,
08732-AP02, Rev AB
e. Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
i. For processes requiring EPL Ga and Gb, rated equipment: electrode, grounding ring, and lining
protector materials Titanium and Zirconium are not allowed.
ii. When “Special Paint Systems” are applied, instructions for safe use regarding potential
electrostatic charging hazard have to be followed.
iii. Terminals 1,2,3,4, for data communication, cannot withstand the 500 V isolation test between
signal and ground, due to integral transient protection. This must be taken into account upon
installation.
iv. Conduit entries must be installed to maintain the enclosure ingress rating of IP66.
v. In order to maintain the ingress protection level on the M3 and M4 electrode housing, the copper
crush washer that seals the electrode access plug shall be replaced when the plug is reinstalled.
The copper crush washer is one time use only.
vi. The flow tube and transmitter are not allowed to be thermally insulated.
vii. The property class of the special fasteners which attach the Magnetic Flow Tube or Transmitter
Remote Junction Box to the Magnetic Transmitter is A2-70 or A4-70 SST.
viii. For information on the dimensions of the flameproof joints the manufacturer shall be contacted.
ix. The Magnetic Flow Meter Tube contains nonconductive liners over the grounded tube. For
process requiring EPL Ga, precautions shall be taken to avoid the liner being charged by the flow
of nonconductive media.
f. Where necessary, the essential characteristics of tools which may be fitted to the equipment
g. List of the standards, including the issue date, with which the equipment is declared to comply:
i. ATEX - EN 60079-0: 2012 +A11, EN 60079-1: 2007, EN 60079-7: 2007. EN 60079-11: 2012, EN
60079-15: 2010, EN 60079-26: 2007, EN 60079-31: 2014
ii. IEC EX - IEC 60079-0: 2011, IEC 60079-1: 2007, IEC 60079-7: 2006 IEC 60079-11: 2011, IEC
60079-15: 2010, IEC 60079-26: 2006, IEC 60079-31: 2013
h. Supply wire requirements;
Use 10 - 18 AWG wire rated for the proper temperature of the application. For wire 10 - 14 AWG use lugs
or other appropriate connectors. For connections in ambient temperatures above 122°F (50 °C), use a
wire rated for 194 °F (90 °C).
i. Contact address;
i. Rosemount Inc.
12001 Technology Drive
Eden Prairie
MN 55344
United States of America
190
Approval Information
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Approval Information
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Rosemount 8700M Magnetic Flowmeter Platform
IEC EX & ATEX Approval Document
January 29, 2015,
08732-AP02, Rev AB
Nomenclature Magnetic Flow Transmitter Model 8732EM and electrical data
8732EM
I
R
II
1
III
B
IV
2
V
K1
VI
DesigExplanation
nation
I
Model
II
Transmitter Mount
III
Transmitter Power Supply
IV
Outputs
V
Conduit entries
…
M4
VII
Value
8732EM
R
T
1
2
A
B
M
1 or 4
2 or 5
K1 ATEX
K7 IECEx
N1 ATEX
VI
Safety Approval Option
N7 IECEx
ND ATEX
NF IECEx
RT50
VIII
…
SH
IX
…
V2
…
F090…
X
Explanation
Magnetic Flow Transmitter – Field Mount
Remote Mount
Integral Mount
AC (90 - 250 Vac, 50 / 60 Hz), not for Ex nA
DC (12 - 42 Vdc)
4 - 20 mA with digital HART Protocol & Scalable
Pulse Output
4 - 20 mA Intrinsically Safe Output with digital HART
Protocol & Intrinsically Safe Scalable Pulse Output
Modbus RS-485
½-14 NPT female
CM20, M20 female
II 2 (1) G Ex d e [ia Ga] IIC T6…T3 Gb
II 2 D
Ex tb IIIC T80 °C…T200 °C Db
II 2 (1) G Ex d [ia Ga] IIC T6…T3 Gb *
II 2 D
Ex tb IIIC T80 °C…T200 °C Db
Ex d e [ia Ga] IIC T6…T3 Gb
Ex tb IIIC T80 °C…T200 °C Db
Ex d [ia Ga] IIC T6…T3 Gb *
Ex tb IIIC T80 °C…T200 °C Db
II 3 (1) G Ex nA [ia Ga] IIC T4…T3 Gc ***
II 2 D
Ex tb IIIC T80 °C…T200 °C Db
Ex nA [ia Ga] IIC T4…T3 Gc ***
Ex tb IIIC T80 °C…T200 °C Db
II 2 D
Ex tb IIIC T80 °C…T200 °C Db
II 2 D
Ex tb IIIC T80 °C…T200 °C Db
II (1) G
[Ex ia Ga] IIC **
Ex tb IIIC T80 °C…T200 °C Db
Ex tb IIIC T80 °C…T200 °C Db
[Ex ia Ga] IIC **
NOTE: *
Integral Mount (see II) option only
** Intrinsically Safe Output (see IV) option only
*** DC Transmitter Power Supply only (12 - 42 Vdc)
VII
Display Option
VIII
Remote Cable Option
M4
M5
RTxx ****
RHxx ****
LOI
Display
Standard Temperature Component
Extended Temperature Component
NOTE: **** Length = xx x 10 ft, max. 500 ft
IX
Options
X
Specials
-SH
Vx
F090x
Aluminum, standard paint
Stainless Steel Electronics Housing
Special Paint Systems *****
Special Paint Systems *****
NOTE: ***** Subject to special conditions for safe use.
Approval Information
191
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Approval Information
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Rosemount 8700M Magnetic Flowmeter Platform
IEC EX & ATEX Approval Document
January 29, 2015,
08732-AP02, Rev AB
Nomenclature Magnetic Flow Tube Model 8705-M and electrical data
8705 … S A 005 … M4 K1 … G1 L1 B3 … J1 SJ … V1 … SH … F090x
I
II III IV
V VI
VII VIII IX
X XI
XII
XIII
XIV
Designation
Explanation
Value
Explanation
I
Model
8705
Magnetic Flowtube
II
Electrode Material
Custom
See special conditions for safe use
III
Electrode Types
Custom
Seal of electrodes comply with IEC 61010-1
IV
Line Size
005
to
360
½” NPS (15 mm)
to
36” NPS (900 mm)
Electrode Housing *
M0
M1
M2
M3
M4
Category 2 G or 3 G, EPL Gb or Gc
Category 2 G or 3 G, EPL Gb or Gc
Category 1/2 G or 1/3 G, EPL Ga/Gb or Ga/Gc
Category 1/2 G or 1/3 G, EPL Ga/Gb or Ga/Gc
Category 1/2 G or 1/3 G, EPL Ga/Gb or Ga/Gc
V
K1 ATEX
K7 IECEx
VI
Safety Approvals
N1 ATEX
II 1/2 G
II 2 D
Ex e ia IIC T5…T3 Ga/Gb *
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
II 2 G
II 2 D
Ex e ib IIC T5…T3 Gb **
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
Ex e ia IIC T5…T3 Ga/Gb *
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
Ex e ib IIC T5…T3 Gb **
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
line sizes 8”- 36”
II 1/3 G
II 2 D
Ex nA ia IIC T5…T3 Ga/Gc *
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
II 3 G
II 2 D
Ex nA ic IIC T5…T3 Gc *
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
line sizes 0.5” – 6” /
**
line sizes 8”- 36”
N7 IECEx
ND ATEX
NF IECEx
Ex nA ia IIC T5…T3 Ga/Gc *
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
line sizes 0.5” – 6” /
Ex nA ic IIC T5…T3 Gc *
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
II 2 D
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
NOTE: *
**
Electrode Housing M2, M3 and M4 only
Electrode Housing M0 and M1 only
VII
Grounding rings
material
Custom
See special conditions for safe use
VIII
Lining protector
material
Custom
See special conditions for safe use
IX
Mounting
Configuration
B3
Integral Mount with Model 8732EM
X
Optional conduit
entries
J1
CM20, M20 female
XI
Remote Junction Box
(RJB) material
-SJ
Aluminum, Standard Paint
316 Stainless Steel
Special paint options
Vx
Special Paint Systems ***
XII
XIII
XIV
Wrapper (housing)
material
Specials
-SH
F090x
**
Carbon Steel (w. Aluminum RJB), Standard Paint
316 Stainless Steel (w. Stainless Steel RJB)
Special Paint Systems ***
NOTE: *** Subject to special conditions for safe use.
192
Approval Information
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Approval Information
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Rosemount 8700M Magnetic Flowmeter Platform
IEC EX & ATEX Approval Document
January 29, 2015,
08732-AP02, Rev AB
Nomenclature Magnetic Flow Tube Model 8711-M/L and electrical data
8711 … S A 15F L … K1 … G1 … J1 SJ … V1 … F090x
I
II III IV V
VI
VII
VIII IX
X
XI
Designation Explanation
I
II
III
Model
Electrode Material
Electrode Types
IV
Line Size
V
Mounting
Configuration
Value
8711
Custom
Custom
015
to
080
L
M
K1
ATEX
K7 IECEx
VI
Safety Approvals
N1 ATEX
N7 IECEx
ND ATEX
NF IECEx
VII
VIII
IX
X
XI
Grounding rings
material
Optional conduit
entries
Remote Junction
Box material
Special paint
options
Specials
Custom
Explanation
Magnetic Flow Tube
See special conditions for safe use
Seal of electrodes comply with IEC 61010-1.
1½” NPS (40 mm)
to
8” NPS (900 mm)
Remote Mount from Transmitter
Integral Mount with Transmitter
II 2 G
Ex e ib IIC T5…T3 Gb
II 2 D
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
Ex e ib IIC T5…T3 Gb
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
II 3 G
Ex nA ic IIC T5…T3 Gc
II 2 D
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
Ex nA ic IIC T5…T3 Gc
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
II 2 D
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
See special conditions for safe use
J1
CM20, M20 female
-SJ
Aluminum, Standard Paint *
316 Stainless Steel *
NOTE:* Flowtube with Carbon Steel Wrapper (housing)
Vx
Special Paint Systems **
F090x
Special Paint Systems **
NOTE: ** Subject to special conditions for safe use.
Approval Information
193
Appendix B: Approval Information
B.2
194
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
FM hazardous locations
Approval Information
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Approval Information
Appendix B: Approval Information
August 2015
195
Appendix B: Approval Information
August 2015
196
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Approval Information
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Approval Information
Appendix B: Approval Information
August 2015
197
Appendix B: Approval Information
August 2015
198
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Approval Information
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Approval Information
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
B.3
Approval Information
August 2015
ATEX/IECEx hazardous locations
199
Appendix B: Approval Information
August 2015
200
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Approval Information
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Approval Information
Appendix B: Approval Information
August 2015
201
Appendix B: Approval Information
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
t
i M t
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED R
tP
it
August 2015
202
Approval Information
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Approval Information
August 2015
t
i M t
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED R
tP
it
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Approval Information
203
Appendix B: Approval Information
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
i
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED
i
August 2015
204
Approval Information
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Approval Information
August 2015
i
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED
i
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Approval Information
205
Appendix B: Approval Information
August 2015
206
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Approval Information
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Approval Information
Appendix B: Approval Information
August 2015
207
Appendix B: Approval Information
B.4
208
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
Approval Information
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Approval Information
Appendix B: Approval Information
August 2015
209
Appendix B: Approval Information
August 2015
210
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Approval Information
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Approval Information
Appendix B: Approval Information
August 2015
211
Appendix B: Approval Information
August 2015
212
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Approval Information
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
B.5
Appendix B: Approval Information
August 2015
Declaration of Conformity
Approvals Document
July 24, 2015
08732-AP01, Rev AF
Approval Information
213
Appendix B: Approval Information
August 2015
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Approvals Document
July 24, 2015
08732-AP01, Rev AF
214
Approval Information
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Appendix B: Approval Information
August 2015
Approvals Document
July 24, 2015
08732-AP01, Rev AF
Approval Information
215
Appendix B: Approval Information
August 2015
216
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Approval Information
Reference Manual
Appendix C: Modbus Coil and Register Map
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Appendix C
August 2015
Modbus Coil and Register Map
The tables in this appendix provide a complete listing of the registers and coils available in the
product. Configuration details for a particular register or coil can be found elsewhere in this
manual.
Table C-1. Modbus Registers
Register
Description
Parameter
Type
Work
Level
Access
Write
Protect?
1
Status Register 0
bit #0 - Sensor Out of Range
bit #1 - Empty Pipe Condition Detected
bit #2 - I/O Processor Failure
bit #3 - Pulse Output, Out of Range
bit #4 - Update Missed
bit #5 - Output at Alarm Level
bit #6 - Modbus Nonvolatile Memory Error
bit #7 - Pulse Output Fixed
bit #8 - EPROM Checksum Error
bit #9 - NOVRAM Checksum Error
bit #10 - RAM Checksum Error
bit #11 - Factory NOVRAM Checksum Error
bit #12 - Continuous Meter Verification Error
bit #13 - PZR Output is Active
bit #14 - Coil Drive Current is Zero
bit #15 - Reverse Flow Rate Detected
U16
R
N
2
Status Register 1
bit #0 - Internal Flow Simulation Test Error
bit #1 - Excess Auto Zero Correction, ZR too Low
bit #2 - Excess Auto Zero Correction, ZR too High
bit #3 - Auto Zero attempt with Nonzero flow
bit #4 - Totalizer Limit Alert 1
bit #5 - Universal Trim Failure
bit #6 - Flow Limit Alert 1
bit #7 - Flow Limit Alert 2
bit #8 - Electrode Coated Limit 1
bit #9 - Electrode Coated Limit 2
bit #10 - Excess Calibration Correction. GN too Low
bit #11 - Excess Calibration Correction, GN too High
bit #12 - Calibration Attempt Without Calibrator
bit #13 - Grounding/Wiring Fault
bit #14 - High Process Noise Detected
bit #15 - Electronics Temperature Out of Range
U16
R
N
Modbus Coil and Register Map
217
Reference Manual
Appendix C: Modbus Coil and Register Map
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table C-1. Modbus Registers (continued)
Register
218
Description
Parameter
Type
Work
Level
Access
Write
Protect?
3
Status Register 2
bit #0 - Digital I/O 1 Active
bit #1 - Digital Output 2 Active
bit #2 - Diagnostic Status Alert Active
bit #3 - Modbus in Listen Only mode
bit #4 - I/O Processor Comm Failure
bit #5 - Coil Over Current Detected
bit #6 - Sensor Electrode Saturated
bit #7 - Coil Power Limit
bit #8 - Electronics Failure
bit #9 - Coil Resistance Error
bit #10 - Coil Inductance Error
bit #11 - Digital Trim Failure
bit #12 - Reverse Flow Detected
bit #13 - Electrode Resistance Error
bit #14 - Auto Zero Failure
bit #15 - Reserved for Status bit
U16
R
N
5
Transmitter State Register
bit #0 - Write Protect Code
bit #1 - Update In Progress
bits #2 - #15 Reserved
U16
R
N
16
Transmitter software revision – (xxxx.x format, e.g., 141
means rev 14.1)
U16
R
N
17
MODBUS Module software revision
U16
R
N
18
Display Type
U8
R
N
20
Internal Flow Simulator Value units
U8
R
N
21
Internal Flow Simulator Deviation units
U8
R
N
22
Coil Inductance Deviation Units
U8
R
N
23
Coil Inductance Units
U8
R
N
24
Coil Resistance Units
U8
R
N
25
Electrode Resistance Units
U8
R
N
26
Electrode Coating Resistance Unit
U8
R
N
27
Empty Pipe Value Units
U8
R
N
28
Electronics Temperature Units
U8
R
N
29
Process Density Units
U8
R
N
30
Flowmeter Verification Test summary result
U8
R
N
31
Coil Inductance Test Result
U8
R
N
32
Coil Resistance Test Result
U8
R
N
33
Electrode Resistance Test Result
U8
R
N
34
Internal Simulator Test Result
U8
R
N
Modbus Coil and Register Map
Reference Manual
Appendix C: Modbus Coil and Register Map
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table C-1. Modbus Registers (continued)
Register
Description
Parameter
Type
Work
Level
Access
Write
Protect?
35
Test limits the Flowmeter Verification Test was run
against
U8
R
N
36
Test Condition of the Flowmeter Verification Test
U8
R
N
37
Pulse Scale Factor Units
U8
R
N
61
Flow Units
U8
RW
Y
62
Totalizer A Units
U8
RW
Y
63
Totalizer B Units
U8
RW
Y
64
Totalizer C Units
U8
RW
Y
65
Sensor line size
U8
RW
Y
66
Electrode Material Code
U8
RW
Y
67
Electrode Type Code
U8
RW
Y
68
Transmitter Tag
A8
RW
Y
72
Flange Material Code
U8
RW
Y
73
Flange Type
U8
RW
Y
74
Liner Material Code
U8
RW
Y
75
Base Time Units Code for Special Units
U8
RW
Y
76
Base Reference Units Code for Special Units
U8
RW
Y
77
Coil Drive Frequency
U8
RW
Y
78
Signal Processing Status
U8
RW
Y
79
Digital Signal Processing Operating Mode
U8
RW
Y
80
Signal Processing Number of Samples
U16
RW
Y
81
Flow Display Configuration
U8
RW
Y
83
LOI Language Configuration
U8
RW
Y
84
LOI Display Auto Lock Configuration
U8
RW
Y
85
Pulse Output Mode.
U8
RW
Y
86
Empty Pipe Trigger Counts
U8
RW
Y
87
Flowmeter Verification Limit – Empty Pipe condition
U8
RW
Y
88
Flowmeter Verification Limit – Flowing condition
U8
RW
Y
89
Flowmeter Verification Limit – No Flow condition
U8
RW
Y
Modbus Coil and Register Map
219
Reference Manual
Appendix C: Modbus Coil and Register Map
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table C-1. Modbus Registers (continued)
Register
220
Description
Parameter
Type
Work
Level
Access
Write
Protect?
90
Continuous Meter Verification Test
U8
RW
Y
91
Discrete I/O 1 directional control
U8
RW
Y
92
Discrete I/O 1 input condition
U8
RW
Y
93
Discrete I/O 1 output condition
U8
RW
Y
96
Discrete I/O 2 output condition
U8
RW
Y
97
Flow Limit 1 Mode
U8
RW
Y
98
Flow Limit 2 Mode
U8
RW
Y
99
Totalizer Limit Mode
U8
RW
Y
100
Totalizer A - Reset Configuration
U8
RW
Y
101
Totalizer A - Flow Direction Configuration
U8
RW
Y
102
Totalizer B - Reset Configuration
U8
RW
Y
103
Totalizer B - Flow Direction Configuration
U8
RW
Y
104
Totalizer C - Reset Configuration
U8
RW
Y
105
Totalizer C - Flow Direction Configuration
U8
RW
Y
106
Sensor Signature Select
U8
RW
Y
107
Meter Verification Test Scope (Test Input)
U8
RW
N
108
Meter Verification Test Condition (Test Input)
U8
RW
N
109
MODBUS Device Address
U8
RW
Y
110
Floating Point Byte Order
U8
RW
Y
111
Minimum Modbus Response Delay
U8
RW
Y
114
Modbus Protocol
U8
R
N
115
Modbus Baud Rate
U8
RW
Y
116
Modbus Parity
U8
RW
Y
117
Modbus Stop Bits
U8
RW
Y
119
LOI Auto Lock Time
U8
RW
Y
120
Manufacturers Device Type Code
U8
R
N
121
Manufacturers Id Code
U8
R
N
122
LOI Backlight Control Configuration
U8
RW
Y
151
Device Identification Number
U32
R
N
Modbus Coil and Register Map
Reference Manual
Appendix C: Modbus Coil and Register Map
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table C-1. Modbus Registers (continued)
Register
Description
Parameter
Type
Work
Level
Access
Write
Protect?
153
Primary Variable Sensor Serial Number
U32
RW
Y
155
Final Assembly Number
U32
RW
Y
157
Diagnostic License Key
U32
RW
Y
197
Status Register 0
bit #0 - Sensor Out of Range
bit #1 - Empty Pipe Condition Detected
bit #2 - I/O Processor Failure
bit #3 - Pulse Output, Out of Range
bit #4 - Update Missed
bit #5 - Output at Alarm Level
bit #6 - Modbus Nonvolatile Memory Error
bit #7 - Pulse Output Fixed
bit #8 - EPROM Checksum Error
bit #9 - NOVRAM Checksum Error
bit #10 - RAM Checksum Error
bit #11 - Factory NOVRAM Checksum Error
bit #12 - Continuous Meter Verification Error
bit #13 - PZR Output is Active
bit #14 - Coil Drive Current is Zero
bit #15 - Reverse Flow Rate Detected
U16
R
N
198
Status Register 1
bit #0 - Internal Flow Simulation Test Error
bit #1 - Excess Auto Zero Correction, ZR too Low
bit #2 - Excess Auto Zero Correction, ZR too High
bit #3 - Auto Zero attempt with Nonzero flow
bit #4 - Totalizer Limit Alert 1
bit #5 - Universal Trim Failure
bit #6 - Flow Limit Alert 1
bit #7 - Flow Limit Alert 2
bit #8 - Electrode Coated Limit 1
bit #9 - Electrode Coated Limit 2
bit #10 - Excess Calibration Correction. GN too Low
bit #11 - Excess Calibration Correction, GN too High
bit #12 - Calibration Attempt Without Calibrator
bit #13 - Grounding/Wiring Fault
bit #14 - High Process Noise Detected
bit #15 - Electronics Temperature Out of Range
U16
R
N
199
Status Register 2
bit #0 - Digital I/O 1 Active
bit #1 - Digital Output 2 Active
bit #2 - Diagnostic Status Alert Active
bit #3 - Modbus in Listen Only mode
bit #4 - I/O Processor Comm Failure
bit #5 - Coil Over Current Detected
bit #6 - Sensor Electrode Saturated
bit #7 - Coil Power Limit
bit #8 - Electronics Failure
bit #9 - Coil Resistance Error
bit #10 - Coil Inductance Error
bit #11 - Digital Trim Failure
bit #12 - Reverse Flow Detected
bit #13 - Electrode Resistance Error
bit #14 - Auto Zero Failure
bit #15 - Reserved for Status bit
U16
R
N
201
Flow rate
F32
R
N
Modbus Coil and Register Map
221
Reference Manual
Appendix C: Modbus Coil and Register Map
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table C-1. Modbus Registers (continued)
Register
222
Description
Parameter
Type
Work
Level
Access
Write
Protect?
203
Totalizer A Value
F32
R
N
205
Totalizer B Value
F32
R
N
207
Totalizer C Value
F32
R
N
209
Electronics Temperature Value
F32
R
N
211
Line Noise Value
F32
R
N
213
5 Hz Signal to Noise Ratio (Value)
F32
R
N
215
37 Hz Signal to Noise Ratio (Value)
F32
R
N
217
Signal Power
F32
R
N
219
Empty Pipe Value
F32
R
N
221
Electrode Coating Value
F32
R
N
223
Internal Flow Simulator Percent Deviation (Continuous
Meter Verification)
F32
R
N
225
Electrode Resistance Value (Continuous Meter
Verification)
F32
R
N
227
Coil Resistance Value (Continuous Meter Verification)
F32
R
N
229
Coil Inductance Value (Continuous Meter Verification)
F32
R
N
231
Coil Inductance Deviation (Continuous Meter
Verification)
F32
R
N
233
Pulse Output Value
F32
R
N
235
Internal Flow Simulator Value (Continuous Meter
Verification)
F32
R
N
237
Coil Current
F32
R
N
261
Primary Variable Lower Sensor Limit
F32
R
N
263
Primary Variable Upper Sensor Limit
F32
R
N
267
Internal Flow Simulator Reference Value
F32
R
N
269
Internal Flow Simulator Value (Manual Meter
Verification)
F32
R
N
271
Internal Flow Simulator Deviation (Manual Meter
Verification)
F32
R
N
273
Coil Inductance Deviation (Manual Meter Verification)
F32
R
N
275
Coil Inductance value (Manual Meter Verification)
F32
R
N
277
Coil Resistance value (Manual Meter Verification)
F32
R
N
Modbus Coil and Register Map
Reference Manual
Appendix C: Modbus Coil and Register Map
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table C-1. Modbus Registers (continued)
Register
Description
Parameter
Type
Work
Level
Access
Write
Protect?
279
Electrode Resistance value (Manual Meter Verification)
F32
R
N
281
Electrode Coating Max Resistance Value
F32
R
N
283
Auto Zero Offset
F32
R
N
285
Coil Inductance Signature Value
F32
R
Y
287
Coil Resistance Signature Value
F32
R
Y
289
Electrode Resistance Signature Value
F32
R
Y
321
Flow Damping Value
F32
RW
Y
323
Conversion Factor for Special Units
F32
RW
Y
325
Low Flow Cutoff Value
F32
RW
Y
327
Pulse Scaling Factor
F32
RW
Y
329
Pulse Output Width (milliseconds)
F32
RW
Y
331
Universal Flow Rate
F32
RW
Y
333
Process Density Value
F32
RW
Y
335
Empty Pipe Trigger Level
F32
RW
Y
337
Flow Limit 1 High Value
F32
RW
Y
339
Flow Limit 1 Low Value
F32
RW
Y
341
Flow Limit 2 High Value
F32
RW
Y
343
Flow Limit 2 Low Value
F32
RW
Y
345
Flow Limit Hysteresis
F32
RW
Y
347
Totalizer High Limit Value
F32
RW
Y
349
Totalizer Low Limit Value
F32
RW
Y
351
Totalizier Hysteresis Limit
F32
RW
Y
353
Electrode Coating Threshold Level 1
F32
RW
Y
355
Electrode Coating Threshold Level 2
F32
RW
Y
359
Fixed Pulse Output Value (Write a 0 to clear)
F32
RW
Y
361
Signal Processing Percent Limit
F32
RW
Y
363
Signal Processing Time Limit
F32
RW
Y
409
Special Flow Rate Unit
A4
RW
Y
411
Special Volume Unit
A4
RW
Y
Modbus Coil and Register Map
223
Reference Manual
Appendix C: Modbus Coil and Register Map
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table C-1. Modbus Registers (continued)
Register
224
Description
Parameter
Type
Work
Level
Access
Write
Protect?
413
Sensor Calibration Number
A16
RW
Y
421
Long Tag
A32
RW
Y
437
Message
A32
RW
Y
453
Flow Tube Tag
A8
RW
Y
457
Descriptor
A16
RW
Y
651
Slot 0 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
652
Slot 1 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
653
Slot 2 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
654
Slot 3 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
655
Slot 4 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
656
Slot 5 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
657
Slot 6 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
658
Slot 7 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
659
Slot 8 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
660
Slot 9 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
661
Slot 10 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
662
Slot 11 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
663
Slot 12 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
664
Slot 13 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
665
Slot 14 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
666
Slot 15 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
667
Slot 16 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
668
Slot 17 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
669
Slot 18 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
670
Slot 19 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
671
Slot 20 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
672
Slot 21 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
673
Slot 22 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
674
Slot 23 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
Modbus Coil and Register Map
Reference Manual
Appendix C: Modbus Coil and Register Map
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table C-1. Modbus Registers (continued)
Register
Description
Parameter
Type
Work
Level
Access
Write
Protect?
675
Slot 24 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
676
Slot 25 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
677
Slot 26 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
678
Slot 27 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
679
Slot 28 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
680
Slot 29 Transmitter Variable Index
U8
RW
Y
687
Status Register 0
bit #0 - Sensor Out of Range
bit #1 - Empty Pipe Condition Detected
bit #2 - I/O Processor Failure
bit #3 - Pulse Output, Out of Range
bit #4 - Update Missed
bit #5 - Output at Alarm Level
bit #6 - Modbus Nonvolatile Memory Error
bit #7 - Pulse Output Fixed
bit #8 - EPROM Checksum Error
bit #9 - NOVRAM Checksum Error
bit #10 - RAM Checksum Error
bit #11 - Factory NOVRAM Checksum Error
bit #12 - Continuous Meter Verification Error
bit #13 - PZR Output is Active
bit #14 - Coil Drive Current is Zero
bit #15 - Reverse Flow Rate Detected
U16
R
N
688
Status Register 1
bit #0 - Internal Flow Simulation Test Error
bit #1 - Excess Auto Zero Correction, ZR too Low
bit #2 - Excess Auto Zero Correction, ZR too High
bit #3 - Auto Zero attempt with Nonzero flow
bit #4 - Totalizer Limit Alert 1
bit #5 - Universal Trim Failure
bit #6 - Flow Limit Alert 1
bit #7 - Flow Limit Alert 2
bit #8 - Electrode Coated Limit 1
bit #9 - Electrode Coated Limit 2
bit #10 - Excess Calibration Correction. GN too Low
bit #11 - Excess Calibration Correction, GN too High
bit #12 - Calibration Attempt Without Calibrator
bit #13 - Grounding/Wiring Fault
bit #14 - High Process Noise Detected
bit #15 - Electronics Temperature Out of Range
U16
R
N
Modbus Coil and Register Map
225
Reference Manual
Appendix C: Modbus Coil and Register Map
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table C-1. Modbus Registers (continued)
Register
226
Description
Parameter
Type
Work
Level
Access
Write
Protect?
689
Status Register 2
bit #0 - Digital I/O 1 Active
bit #1 - Digital Output 2 Active
bit #2 - Diagnostic Status Alert Active
bit #3 - Modbus in Listen Only mode
bit #4 - I/O Processor Comm Failure
bit #5 - Coil Over Current Detected
bit #6 - Sensor Electrode Saturated
bit #7 - Coil Power Limit
bit #8 - Electronics Failure
bit #9 - Coil Resistance Error
bit #10 - Coil Inductance Error
bit #11 - Digital Trim Failure
bit #12 - Reverse Flow Detected
bit #13 - Electrode Resistance Error
bit #14 - Auto Zero Failure
bit #15 - Reserved for Status bit
U16
R
N
691
Slot 0 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
693
Slot 1 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
695
Slot 2 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
697
Slot 3 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
699
Slot 4 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
701
Slot 5 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
703
Slot 6 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
705
Slot 7 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
707
Slot 8 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
709
Slot 9 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
711
Slot 10 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
713
Slot 11 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
715
Slot 12 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
717
Slot 13 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
719
Slot 14 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
721
Slot 15 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
723
Slot 16 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
725
Slot 17 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
727
Slot 18 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
729
Slot 19 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
Modbus Coil and Register Map
Reference Manual
Appendix C: Modbus Coil and Register Map
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table C-1. Modbus Registers (continued)
Register
Description
Parameter
Type
Work
Level
Access
Write
Protect?
731
Slot 20 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
733
Slot 21 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
735
Slot 22 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
737
Slot 23 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
739
Slot 24 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
741
Slot 25 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
743
Slot 26 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
745
Slot 27 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
747
Slot 28 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
749
Slot 29 Transmitter Variable
F32
R
N
1137
Attached Core Software revision
U16
R
N
1138
Board Type (see board type codes table)
U16
R
N
1162
Device Type Code for attached Core
U8
R
N
Parameter
Type
Work
Level
Access
Write
Protect?
Table C-2. Modbus Coils
Coil
Description
1
Sensor Out of Range
U8
R
N
2
Empty Pipe Condition Detected
U8
R
N
3
I/O Processor Failure
U8
R
N
4
Pulse Output, Out of Range
U8
R
N
5
Update Missed
U8
R
N
6
Output at Alarm Level
U8
R
N
7
Modbus Nonvolatile Memory Error
U8
R
N
8
Pulse Output Fixed
U8
R
N
9
EPROM Checksum Error
U8
R
N
10
NOVRAM Checksum Error
U8
R
N
11
RAM Checksum Error
U8
R
N
Modbus Coil and Register Map
227
Reference Manual
Appendix C: Modbus Coil and Register Map
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table C-2. Modbus Coils (continued)
Coil
228
Description
Parameter
Type
Work
Level
Access
Write
Protect?
12
Factory NOVRAM Checksum Error
U8
R
N
13
Continuous Meter Verification Error
U8
R
N
14
PZR Output is Active
U8
R
N
15
Coil Drive Current is Zero
U8
R
N
16
Reverse Flow Rate Detected
U8
R
N
17
Internal Flow Simulation Test Error
U8
R
N
18
Excess Auto Zero Correction, ZR too Low
U8
R
N
19
Excess Auto Zero Correction, ZR too High
U8
R
N
20
Auto Zero attempt with Nonzero flow
U8
R
N
21
Totalizer Limit Alert 1
U8
R
N
22
Universal Trim Failure
U8
R
N
23
Flow Limit Alert 1
U8
R
N
24
Flow Limit Alert 2
U8
R
N
25
Electrode Coated Limit 1
U8
R
N
26
Electrode Coated Limit 2
U8
R
N
27
Excess Calibration Correction. GN too Low
U8
R
N
28
Excess Calibration Correction, GN too High
U8
R
N
29
Calibration Attempt Without Calibrator
U8
R
N
30
Grounding/Wiring Fault
U8
R
N
31
High Process Noise Detected
U8
R
N
32
Electronics Temperature Out of Range
U8
R
N
33
Digital I/O 1 Active
U8
R
N
34
Digital Output 2 Active
U8
R
N
35
Diagnostic Status Alert Active
U8
R
N
36
Modbus in Listen Only mode
U8
R
N
37
I/O Processor Comm Failure
U8
R
N
38
Coil Over Current Detected
U8
R
N
39
Sensor Electrode Saturated
U8
R
N
40
Coil Power Limit
U8
R
N
Modbus Coil and Register Map
Reference Manual
Appendix C: Modbus Coil and Register Map
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table C-2. Modbus Coils (continued)
Coil
Description
Parameter
Type
Work
Level
Access
Write
Protect?
41
Electronics Failure
U8
R
N
42
Coil Resistance Error
U8
R
N
43
Coil Inductance Error
U8
R
N
44
Digital Trim Failure
U8
R
N
45
Reverse Flow Detected
U8
R
N
46
Electrode Resistance Error
U8
R
N
47
Auto Zero Failure
U8
R
N
65
Write Protect Switch State
U8
R
N
66
Update In Progress
U8
R
N
67
License Status - High Process Noise
U8
R
N
68
License Status - Grounding/Wiring
U8
R
N
69
License Status - Digital I/O
U8
R
N
70
License Status - Meter Verification
U8
R
N
71
License Status - Electrode Coating
U8
R
N
97
Enable/Disable Flow Limit Alert 1
U8
RW
Y
98
Enable/Disable Flow Limit Alert 2
U8
RW
Y
99
Enable/Disable Reverse Flow
U8
RW
Y
100
Lock/Unlock LOI
U8
RW
Y
101
Start/Stop All Totalizers
U8
RW
N
103
Reset All Totals
U8
RW
N
104
Reset Totalizer A
U8
RW
N
105
Reset Totalizer B
U8
RW
N
106
Reset Totalizer C
U8
RW
N
107
Enable/Disable Totalizer Limit Alert
U8
RW
Y
108
Perform Transmitter Self Test
U8
RW
N
109
Perform Electronics Trim
U8
RW
Y
110
Perform Auto Zero Trim
U8
RW
Y
111
Perform Universal Trim
U8
RW
Y
112
Perform Meter Verification
U8
RW
N
Modbus Coil and Register Map
229
Reference Manual
Appendix C: Modbus Coil and Register Map
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table C-2. Modbus Coils (continued)
Parameter
Type
Work
Level
Access
Write
Protect?
Coil
Description
113
Perform Sensor Signature
U8
RW
Y
114
Perform Recall Last Saved Sensor Signature
U8
RW
Y
115
Perform Clear Electrode Coating Max Value
U8
RW
N
116
Perform Master Reset
U8
RW
Y
117
Enable/Disable Empty Pipe Detection
U8
RW
Y
118
Enable/Disable High Process Noise Detection
U8
RW
Y
119
Enable/Disable Grounding/Wiring Fault Detection
U8
RW
Y
120
Enable/Disable Electronics Temperature Detection
U8
RW
Y
121
Enable/Disable Electrode Coating Detection
U8
RW
Y
122
Enable/Disable Continuous Meter Verfication Coil Test
U8
RW
Y
123
Enable/Disable Continuous Meter Verfication Electrode
Test
U8
RW
Y
124
Enable/Disable Continuous Meter Verfication Transmitter
Test
U8
RW
Y
126
Enable/Disable Diagnostic Status Alert - Electronics Failure
U8
RW
Y
127
Enable/Disable Diagnostic Status Alert - Coil Open Circuit
U8
RW
Y
128
Enable/Disable Diagnostic Status Alert - Empty Pipe
U8
RW
Y
129
Enable/Disable Diagnostic Status Alert - Reverse Flow
U8
RW
Y
130
Enable/Disable Diagnostic Status Alert - Ground/Wiring
Fault
U8
RW
Y
131
Enable/Disable Diagnostic Status Alert - High Process Noise
U8
RW
Y
132
Enable/Disable Diagnostic Status Alert - Elect Temp Out of
Range
U8
RW
Y
133
Enable/Disable Diagnostic Status Alert - Electrode Coating
Limit 1
U8
RW
Y
134
Enable/Disable Diagnostic Status Alert - Electrode Coating
Limit 2
U8
RW
Y
135
Enable/Disable Diagnostic Status Alert - Continuous Meter
Verification
U8
RW
Y
136
Enable/Disable Diagnostic Status Alert - Coil Over Current
U8
RW
Y
137
Enable/Disable Diagnostic Status Alert - Sensor Electrode
Saturated
U8
RW
Y
138
Enable/Disable Diagnostic Status Alert - Coil Power Limit
U8
RW
Y
230
Modbus Coil and Register Map
Reference Manual
Appendix C: Modbus Coil and Register Map
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Table C-2. Modbus Coils (continued)
Parameter
Type
Work
Level
Access
Write
Protect?
Coil
Description
139
Enable/Disable Totalizer Start/Stop Write Protect
U8
RW
Y
140
Enable/Disable Totalizer Reset Write Protect
U8
RW
Y
141
Enable/disable totalizer start/stop from LOI
U8
RW
Y
142
Enable/disable totalizer reset from LOI
U8
RW
Y
Modbus Coil and Register Map
231
Appendix C: Modbus Coil and Register Map
August 2015
232
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Modbus Coil and Register Map
Reference Manual
Appendix D: Wiring Diagrams
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Appendix D
D.1
August 2015
Wiring Diagrams
8732EM wiring diagrams
Figure D-1. 8732EM Wiring Diagram—Component Cables
Wiring Diagrams
233
Appendix D: Wiring Diagrams
August 2015
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Figure D-2. 8732EM Wiring Diagram—Combination Cable
234
Wiring Diagrams
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Appendix E
Implementing a Universal
Transmitter
Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 239
Rosemount sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 243
Brooks sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 247
Endress and Hauser sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 249
Fischer and Porter sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 250
Foxboro sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 256
Kent Veriflux VTC sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 260
Kent sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 261
Krohne sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 262
Taylor sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 263
Yamatake Honeywell sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 265
Yokogawa sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 266
Generic manufacturer sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 267
E.1
Safety messages
Instructions and procedures in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operations. Please read the following safety messages before
performing any operation described in this section.
The Rosemount 8732EM Transmitter has not been evaluated for use with other
manufacturers' magnetic flowmeter sensors in hazardous (Ex or Classified) areas. Special
care should be taken by the end-user and installer that the 8732EM Transmitter meets the
safety and performance requirements of the other manufacturer’s equipment.
E.1.1
Universal capability
The 8732EM Transmitter has the ability to drive other manufacturers' sensors. In addition to
providing a flow measurement, all diagnostic functionality is available. This capability can
provide additional information about the installation, the process, and the health of the sensor.
Universal capabilities enable a common maintenance practice for all magnetic flowmeter
installations and help reduce spares inventory of magnetic flowmeter transmitters.
This section provides wiring diagrams for connecting the 8732 EM Transmitter to other
manufacturers' sensors, and describes how to configure the universal capabilities.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
239
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
E.1.2
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Three step process
There are three steps to implementing a universal transmitter:
1.
Review the existing application. Verify that the existing sensor is in good working order,
and that it is compatible with a universal transmitter. Use Table E-1 to locate the wiring
diagram that applies to your sensor. While the Universal transmitter may be able to
drive the existing sensor, if the sensor is not in good working order, the universal
transmitter may not function correctly.
2.
Connect the universal transmitter to the existing sensor using the appropriate wiring
diagram from this appendix. If the sensor you are using is not listed in this appendix,
contact Rosemount technical support for more details on the application of the
universal capabilities.
3.
Configure the transmitter following the guidelines in Section 4: Operation and
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality, setting up parameters as needed.
One of the key configuration parameters is the sensor calibration number. There are
several methods to determine the calibration number, but the most common method
will be to use the universal trim capability. This functionality is detailed in this appendix.
Accuracy of the meter when the universal trim is used to determine the calibration
number will be dependent on the accuracy of the known flow rate used in the trim
process.
In addition to the universal trim, there are two other methodologies for determining a
calibration number for the sensor:
Method 1: Have the sensor sent to a Rosemount service center for determination of a
calibration number compatible with the universal transmitter. This is the most accurate method
for determining the calibration number and will provide a ±0.5% of rate measurement accuracy
from 3 to 40 fps (1-10 m/s).
Method 2: Involves the conversion of the existing sensor calibration number / meter factors to
an equivalent Rosemount 16-digit calibration number. Accuracy of the meter using this
methodology is estimated to be in the range of 2-3%. Contact the Rosemount technical support
for more information on this method or to determine a calibration number for the existing
sensor.
Once these steps are completed, the meter will begin measuring flow. Verify the measured flow
rate is within the expected range and that the output correctly corresponds to the measured
flow rate. Also verify the reading in the control system matches the reading at the transmitter.
Once these items have been verified, the loop can be placed into automatic control as needed.
240
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Universal trim
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Trims, Universal Trim
Modbus coil
111
Modbus coil value
Operating mode
0
Normal operating mode
1
Perform universal trim
The universal auto trim function enables the Rosemount 8732 to determine a calibration
number for sensors that were not calibrated at the Rosemount factory. The function is activated
as one step in a procedure known as in-process calibration. If the sensor has a 16-digit
Rosemount calibration number, in-process calibration is not required. If it does not, or if the
sensor is made by another manufacturer, complete the following steps for in-process
calibration.
1.
Determine the flow rate of the process fluid in the sensor.
Note
The flow rate in the line can be determined by using another sensor in the line, by counting the
revolutions of a centrifugal pump, or by performing a bucket test to determine how fast a given
volume is filled by the process fluid. Flow rate must be greater than 1 ft / sec.
2.
Write the flow rate to Modbus register 331.
3.
Initiate the universal trim by writing 1 to Modbus coil 111.
When the trim is completed, the sensor is ready for use.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
241
Reference Manual
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Wiring the universal transmitter
The wiring diagrams in this section illustrate the proper connections between the transmitter
and most sensors currently on the market. Specific diagrams are included for most models, and
where information for a particular model of a manufacturer is not available, a generic drawing
pertaining to that manufacturer's sensors is provided. If the manufacturer for the existing
sensor is not included, see the drawing for generic connections.
Any trademarks used herein regarding sensors not manufactured by Rosemount are owned by
the particular manufacturer of the sensor.
Table E-1. Rosemount 8732 Transmitter-to-Sensor Wiring Reference
Sensor manufacturer
242
Page number
Rosemount 8705, 8707, 8711
243
Rosemount 8701
245
Brooks Model 5000
247
Brooks Model 7400
248
Endress and Hauser
249
Fischer and Porter Model 10D1418
250
Fischer and Porter Model 10D1419
251
Fischer and Porter Model 10D1430 (Remote)
252
Fischer and Porter Model 10D1430
253
Fischer and Porter Model 10D1465, 10D1475 (Integral)
254
Fischer and Porter Sensors (generic)
255
Foxboro Series 1800
256
Foxboro Series 1800 (Version 2)
257
Foxboro Series 2800
258
Foxboro Sensors (generic)
259
Kent Veriflux VTC
260
Kent Sensors (generic)
261
Krohne Sensors (generic)
262
Taylor Series 1100
263
Taylor Sensors (generic)
264
Yamatake Honeywell Sensors (generic)
265
Yokogawa Sensors (generic)
266
Generic Manufacturer Sensors
267
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
E.2
Rosemount sensors
E.2.1
8705/8707/8711/8721 Sensors to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Rosemount 8705/8707/8711/8721 Sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter,
connect coil drive and electrode cables as shown in Figure E-1.
Figure E-1. Wiring Diagram for a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter
Table E-2. Rosemount 8705/8707/8711/8721 Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732 Transmitters Rosemount 8705/8707/8711/8721 Sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
1
2
3
17
18
19
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the
transmitter coil excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
243
Reference Manual
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
E.2.2
8705 M and 8711 M/L Sensors to 8732EM Transmitter
To connect a Rosemount 8705 M or 8711 M/L Sensor to a Rosemount 8732EM Transmitter,
connect coil drive and electrode cables as shown in Figure E-2.
Figure E-2. Wiring Diagram for a Rosemount 8732EM Transmitter
Table E-3. Rosemount 8705/8711 Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732 Transmitters
Rosemount 8705/8711 Sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
1/+
2/–
3 / SC
17 / SE
18 / –
19 / +
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the
transmitter coil excitation circuit.
244
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
E.2.3
8701 sensor to 8732 transmitter
To connect a Rosemount 8701 sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and
electrode cables as shown in Figure E-3.
Figure E-3. Wiring Diagram for Rosemount 8701 Sensor and Rosemount 8732 Transmitter
Rosemount 8701 sensor
Rosemount 8732 Transmitter
17 1
1
18 2
2
19
3
17
18
19
Refer to Figure E-1 on page 243 for actual
terminal block configuration drawing.
Table E-4. Rosemount 8701 Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Rosemount 8701 sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
1
2
3
17
18
19
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the
transmitter coil excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
245
Reference Manual
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
E.2.4
Connecting sensors of other manufacturers
Before connecting another manufacturer’s sensor to the transmitter, it is necessary to perform
the following functions.
1.
Turn off the AC power to the sensor and transmitter. Failure to do so could result in
electrical shock or damage to the transmitter.
2.
Verify the coil drive cables between the sensor and the transmitter are not connected
to any other equipment.
3.
Label the coil drive cables and electrode cables for connection to the transmitter.
4.
Disconnect the wires from the existing transmitter.
5.
Remove the existing transmitter. Mount the new transmitter. See “Installation” on
page 3.
6.
Verify the sensor coil is configured for series connection. Other manufacturers sensors
may be wired in either a series or parallel circuit. All Rosemount magnetic sensors are
wired in a series circuit. (Other manufacturers AC sensors (AC coils) wired for 220 V
operation are typically wired in parallel and must be rewired in series.)
7.
Verify the sensor is in good working condition. Use the manufacturer’s recommended
test procedure for verification of sensor condition. Perform the basic checks:
8.
Check the coils for shorts or open circuits.
9.
Check the sensor liner for wear or damage.
10.
Check the electrodes for shorts, leaks, or damage.
11.
Connect the sensor to the transmitter in accordance with reference wiring diagrams.
See Appendix A: Implementing a Universal Transmitter for specific drawings.
12.
Connect and verify all connections between the sensor and the transmitter, then apply
power to the transmitter.
13.
Perform the Universal Auto Trim function.
Do not connect mains or line
power to the magnetic
flowtube sensor or to the
transmitter coil excitation
circuit.
246
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
E.3
Brooks sensors
E.3.1
Model 5000 sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Model 5000 sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and
electrode cables as shown in Figure E-4.
Figure E-4. Wiring Diagram for Brooks Sensor Model 5000 and Rosemount 8732
Brooks Model 5000
Rosemount 8732 Transmitter
19
18
17
3
2
1
Refer to Figure E-1 on page 243 for actual terminal
block configuration drawing.
Table E-5. Brooks Model 5000 Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Brooks sensors Model 5000
1
2
3
17
18
19
1
2
3
17
18
19
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the
transmitter coil excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
247
Reference Manual
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
E.3.2
Model 7400 sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Model 7400 sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and
electrode cables as shown in Figure E-5.
Figure E-5. Wiring Diagram for Brooks Sensor Model 7400 and Rosemount 8732
BROOKS MODEL 7400
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
19
18
17
3
2
1
Refer to Figure E-1 on page 243 for actual
terminal block configuration drawing.
Table E-6. Brooks Model 7400 sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Brooks Sensors Model 7400
1
2
3
17
18
19
Coils +
Coils –
3
Shield
Electrode +
Electrode –
Do not connect mains or line power to
the magnetic flowtube sensor or to the
transmitter coil excitation circuit.
248
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
E.4
Endress and Hauser sensors
E.4.1
Endress and Hauser sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect an Endress and Hauser sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive
and electrode cables as shown in Figure E-6.
Figure E-6. Wiring Diagram for Endress and Hauser Sensors and Rosemount 8732
ENDRESS AND HAUSER
SENSORS
Coils
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
41
1
42
2
3
Electrodes
4
17
5
18
7
19
Refer to Figure E-1 on page 243 for actual terminal
block configuration drawing.
Table E-7. Endress and Hauser Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Endress and Hauser sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
41
42
14
4
5
7
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
249
Reference Manual
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
E.5
Fischer and Porter sensors
E.5.1
Model 10D1418 sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Model 10D1418 sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and
electrode cables as shown in Figure E-7.
Figure E-7. Wiring Diagram for Fischer and Porter Sensor Model 10D1418 and Rosemount
8732
Electrode Connections
ROSEMOUNT 8732 TRANSMITTER
3
2
19
1
18
17
3
U1
U2
2
G
1
L1
L2
8
Coil Connections
6
7
Refer to Figure E-1 on page 243 for actual
terminal block configuration drawing.
5
Table E-8. Fischer and Porter Model 10D1418 Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Fischer and Porter Model 10D1418 sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
L1
L2
Chassis Ground
3
1
2
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
250
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
E.5.2
Model 10D1419 sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Model 10D1419 sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and
electrode cables as shown in Figure E-8.
Figure E-8. Wiring Diagram for Fischer and Porter Sensor Model 10D1419 and Rosemount
8732
Electrode Connections
ROSEMOUNT 8732 TRANSMITTER
3
2
19
1
18
16
17
17
3
18
2
L1
1
L2
Refer to Figure E-1 on page 243 for actual
terminal block configuration drawing.
Coil Connections
Table E-9. Fischer and Porter Model 10D1419 Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Fischer and Porter Model 10D1419 sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
L1
L2
3
3
1
2
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
251
Reference Manual
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
E.5.3
Model 10D1430 sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Model 10D1430 sensor (Remote) to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil
drive and electrode cables as shown in Figure E-9.
Figure E-9. Wiring Diagram for Fischer and Porter Sensor Model 10D1430 (Remote) and
Rosemount 8732
Electrode Connections
ROSEMOUNT 8732 TRANSMITTER
1
2
19
3
18
17
3
G
2
L1
1
8
Coil Connections
Refer to Figure E-1 on page 243 for actual
terminal block configuration drawing.
Table E-10. Fischer and Porter Model 10D1430 (Remote) Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Fischer and Porter Model 10D1430
(Remote) sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
L1
8
G
3
1
2
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
252
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
E.5.4
Model 10D1430 sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Model 10D1430 sensor (integral) to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil
drive and electrode cables as shown in Figure E-10.
Figure E-10. Wiring Diagram for Fischer and Porter Sensor Model 10D1430 (Integral) and
Rosemount 8732
Electrode Connections
ROSEMOUNT 8732 TRANSMITTER
19
1
1
2
3
17
3
7
6
7
6
8
2
L2
To L2
L2
L1
1
L1
U2
U1
G
U2
U1
TB1
18
2
3
Coil Connections
TB2
Refer to Figure E-1 on page 243 for actual terminal
block configuration drawing.
To Calibration Device
(Disconnect)
Table E-11. Fischer and Porter Model 10D1430 (integral) Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Fischer and Porter Model 10D1430 (Integral) sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
L1
L2
G
3
1
2
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
253
Reference Manual
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
E.5.5
Model 10D1465/10D1475 sensors to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Model 10D1465 or 10D1475 sensor (integral) to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter,
connect coil drive and electrode cables as shown in Figure E-11.
Figure E-11. Wiring Diagram for Fischer and Porter Sensor Model 10D1465 and Model
10D1475 (integral) and Rosemount 8732
Electrode
Connections
ROSEMOUNT 8732 TRANSMITTER
2A
Disconnect
2
19
1
18
5
17
6
3
16
3
1
2
CT
M2
M1
MR
Coil Connections
Refer to Figure E-1 on page 243 for actual terminal block
configuration drawing.
Table E-12. Fischer and Porter Model 10D1465 and 10D1475 Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Fischer and Porter Model 10D1465 and
10D1475 sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
M1
MR
3
3
1
2
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the
transmitter coil excitation circuit.
254
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
E.5.6
Fischer and Porter sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Fischer and Porter sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and
electrode cables as shown in Figure E-12.
Figure E-12. Generic Wiring Diagram for Fischer and Porter Sensors and Rosemount 8732
FISCHER AND PORTER
SENSORS
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
Electrodes
19
2
18
1
17
3
Coils
Chassis
3
M2
2
M1
1
Refer to Figure E-1 on page 243 for actual terminal
block configuration drawing.
Table E-13. Fischer and Porter Generic Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Fischer and Porter sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
M1
M2
Chassis Ground
3
1
2
Do not connect mains or line power
to the magnetic flowtube sensor or
to the transmitter coil excitation
circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
255
Reference Manual
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
E.6
Foxboro sensors
E.6.1
Series 1800 sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Series 1800 sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and
electrode cables as shown in Figure E-13.
Figure E-13. Wiring Diagram for Foxboro Series 1800 and Rosemount 8732
FOXBORO SERIES 1800
SENSOR
Electrode Connections
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
White Lead
Outer Shield
White Shield
19
18
17
3
2
Black Lead
Black Shield
Inner Shield
1
Refer to Figure E-1 on page 243 for actual
terminal block configuration drawing.
Coil Connections
Table E-14. Foxboro Series1800 Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Foxboro Series 1800 sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
L1
L2
Chassis Ground
Any Shield
Black
White
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
256
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
E.6.2
Series 1800 sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Series 1800 (version 2) sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive
and electrode cables as shown in Figure E-14.
Figure E-14. Wiring Diagram for Foxboro Series 1800 (Version 2) and Rosemount 8732
FOXBORO SERIES
1800 SENSOR
(VERSION 2)
ROSEMOUNT
8732
TRANSMITTER
White
Black
Shield
19
18
17
Electrode
Connections
3
GND
L2
2
L1
1
Coil Connections
Refer to Figure E-1 on page 243 for
actual terminal block configuration
drawing.
Table E-15. Foxboro Series 1800 (Version 2) Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Foxboro Series 1800 sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
L1
L2
Chassis Ground
Any Shield
Black
White
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
257
Reference Manual
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
E.6.3
Series 2800 Sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Series 2800 Sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and
electrode cables as shown in Figure E-15.
Figure E-15. Wiring Diagram for Foxboro Series 2800 and Rosemount 8732
FOXBORO SERIES 2800
SENSOR
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
Electrode Connections
Outer Shield
White Lead
White Shield
White
Black
19
Any Shield
18
17
3
Black Lead
Black Shield
Inner Shield
2
1
L2
L1
G
Coil Connections
Refer to Figure E-1 on page 243 for
actual terminal block configuration
drawing.
Table E-16. Foxboro Series 2800 Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Foxboro Series 2800 Sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
L1
L2
Chassis Ground
Any Shield
Black
White
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
258
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
E.6.4
Foxboro Sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Foxboro Sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and electrode
cables as shown in Figure E-16.
Figure E-16. Generic Wiring Diagram for Foxboro Sensors and Rosemount 8732
FOXBORO SENSOR
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
White
19
Black
18
Any Shield
17
Electrodes
Coils
Ground
3
L2
2
L1
1
Refer to Figure E-1 on page 243 for actual
terminal block configuration drawing.
Table E-17. Foxboro Generic Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Foxboro sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
L1
L2
Chassis Ground
Any Shield
Black
White
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
259
Reference Manual
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
E.7
Kent Veriflux VTC sensor
E.7.1
Veriflux VTC sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Veriflux VTC sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and
electrode cables as shown in Figure E-17.
Figure E-17. Wiring Diagram for Kent Veriflux VTC Sensor and Rosemount 8732
KENT VERIFLUX VTC
SENSOR
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
Electrode Connections
19
18
17
1SCR OUT
2
3 SIG 1
4 SIG 2
5
6
3
2
1
1
2–
5+
6 SCR OUT
Refer to Figure E-1 on page 243 for
actual terminal block configuration
drawing.
Coil Connections
Table E-18. Kent Veriflux VTC Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Kent Veriflux VTC sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
2
1
SCR OUT
SCR OUT
SIG1
SIG2
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
260
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
E.8
Kent sensors
E.8.1
Kent sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Kent sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and electrode
cables as shown in Figure E-18.
Figure E-18. Generic Wiring Diagram for Kent Sensors and Rosemount 8732
KENT SENSORS
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
SIG2
19
SIG1
18
SCR OUT
17
Electrodes
SCR OUT
3
2
2
1
1
Coils
Refer to Figure E-1 on page 243 for
actual terminal block configuration
drawing.
Table E-19. Kent Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Kent sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
1
2
SCR OUT
SCR OUT
SIG1
SIG2
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
261
Reference Manual
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
E.9
Krohne sensors
E.9.1
Krohne sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Krohne sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and electrode
cables as shown in Figure E-19.
Figure E-19. Generic Wiring Diagram for Krohne Sensors and Rosemount 8732
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
KROHNE SENSORS
3
19
2
18
Electrode Shield
17
Electrodes
Coil Shield
3
7
2
8
1
Coils
Refer to Figure E-1 on page 243 for
actual terminal block configuration
drawing.
Table E-20. Krohne Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Krohne sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
8
7
Coil Shield
Electrode Shield
2
3
Do not connect mains or line power to the magnetic
flowtube sensor or to the transmitter coil excitation
circuit.
262
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
E.10
Taylor sensors
E.10.1
Series 1100 sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Series 1100 sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and
electrode cables as shown in Figure E-20.
Figure E-20. Wiring Diagram for Taylor Series 1100 Sensors and Rosemount 8732
TAYLOR SERIES 1100 SENSOR
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
Electrode Connections
19
C
L
A
18
17
3
2
1
LNG1234
White
Black
Green
Coil Connections
Refer to Figure E-1 on page 243 for actual
terminal block configuration drawing.
Table E-21. Taylor Series 1100 Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Taylor Series 1100 sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
Black
White
Green
S1 and S2
E1
E2
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
263
Reference Manual
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
E.10.2
Taylor sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Taylor sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and electrode
cables as shown in Figure E-21.
Figure E-21. Generic Wiring Diagram for Taylor Sensors and Rosemount 8732
TAYLOR SENSORS
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
E2
19
E1
18
S1 and S2
17
Electrodes
Coils
Green
3
White
2
Black
1
Refer to Figure E-1 on page 243 for actual terminal
block configuration drawing.
Table E-22. Taylor Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Taylor sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
Black
White
Green
S1 and S2
E1
E2
Do not connect mains or line power to the magnetic
flowtube sensor or to the transmitter coil excitation
circuit.
264
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
E.11
Yamatake Honeywell sensors
E.11.1
Yamatake Honeywell sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Yamatake Honeywell sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive
and electrode cables as shown in Figure E-22.
Figure E-22. Generic Wiring Diagram for Yamatake Honeywell Sensors and Rosemount
8732
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
YAMATAKE
HONEYWELL
SENSORS
Electrodes
A
19
B
18
C
17
Chassis Ground
Coils
3
Y
2
X
1
Refer to Figure E-1 on page 243 for actual terminal
block configuration drawing.
Table E-23. Yamatake Honeywell Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Yamatake Honeywell sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
X
Y
Chassis Ground
C
B
A
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
265
Reference Manual
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
E.12
Yokogawa sensors
E.12.1
Yokogawa sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Yokogawa sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and
electrode cables as shown in Figure E-23.
Figure E-23. Generic Wiring Diagram for Yokogawa Sensors and Rosemount 8732
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
YOKOGAWA
SENSORS
Electrodes
A
19
B
18
C
17
Chassis Ground
3
Ex 2
2
Ex 1
1
Coils
Refer to Figure E-1 on page 243 for
actual terminal block configuration
drawing.
Table E-24. Yokogawa Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Yokogawa sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
EX1
EX2
Chassis Ground
C
B
A
Do not connect mains or line
power to the magnetic flowtube
sensor or to the transmitter coil
excitation circuit.
266
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
August 2015
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
E.13
Generic manufacturer sensors
E.13.1
Generic manufacturer sensor to 8732 Transmitter
E.13.2
Identify the terminals
First check the sensor manufacturer’s manual to identify the appropriate terminals. Otherwise,
perform the following procedure.
Identify coil and electrode terminals
1.
Select a terminal and touch an ohmmeter probe to it.
2.
Touch the second probe to each of the other terminals and record the results for each
terminal.
3.
Repeat the process and record the results for every terminal.
Coil terminals will have a resistance of approximately 3-300 ohms.
Electrode terminals will have an open circuit.
Identify a chassis ground
1.
Touch one probe of an ohmmeter to the sensor chassis.
2.
Touch the other probe to the each sensor terminal and the record the results for each
terminal.
The chassis ground will have a resistance value of one ohm or less.
E.13.3
Wiring connections
1.
Connect the electrode terminals to Rosemount 8732 terminals
18 and 19. The electrode shield should be connected to terminal 17.
2.
Connect the coil terminals to Rosemount 8732 terminals 1, 2, and 3.
3.
If the Rosemount 8732 Transmitter indicates a reverse flow condition, switch the coil
wires connected to terminals 1 and 2.
Do not connect mains or line
power to the magnetic flowtube
sensor or to the transmitter coil
excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
267
Appendix E: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
August 2015
268
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
Index
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Index
A
Analog Output Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Analog Output Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Applications/Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Auxiliary Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162, 163
Grounding
Grounding Electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Grounding Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Lining Protectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
I
B
Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
C
Conductivity
Model 8705/8707 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Model 8711 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Configurations/Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Cover Gasket, Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . 166
D
Device Software Functions
basic setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
F
Flow Rate
units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Flowtube
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Flowtubes
Brooks Model 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Endress and Hauser Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Fischer and Porter Model 10D1418 . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Foxboro Series 1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Generic Flowtube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Kent Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Kent Veriflux VTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Krohne Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Taylor Series 1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Yamatake Honeywell Flowtubes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Yokogawa Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Installation
mechanical considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Wafer Flowtube
Flange Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
L
Lining Protectors
Grounding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Local Operator Interface (LOI)
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
M
Mechanical Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Messages
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
O
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Orientation
Flowtube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Output Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
P
Paint, Materials of Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Load Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure
Model 8705/8707 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model 8711 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse Output Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
166
162
169
175
162
G
Gaskets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 17
S
Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Index
269
Reference Manual
Index
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Specifications
Model 8705 and Model 8707
ambient temperature limits . . . . . . . . . . .
conductivity limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
electrical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
functional specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
grounding rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
interchangeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
line sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lining protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
non-wetted materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
performance specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
pressure limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
process conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
process temperature limits . . . . . . . . . . . .
process wetted materials . . . . . . . . . . . . .
service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
upper range limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vacuum limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model 8711
ambient temperature limits . . . . . . . . . . .
conductivity limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
functional specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
interchangeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
line sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
non-wetted materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
process conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
process temperature limits . . . . . . . . . . . .
process-wetted materials . . . . . . . . . . . . .
safe working pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
upper range limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications and Reference Data
Functional Specifications
Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
169
169
172
171
168
173
168
168
171
173
171
170
171
169
172
168
171
168
168
169
173
Wiring Diagrams
Brooks Model 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Endress and Hauser Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fisher and Porter Model 10D1418 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foxboro Series 1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generic Flowtube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Kent Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Kent Veriflux VTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Krohne Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Taylor Series 1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Yamatake Honeywell Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Yokogawa Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
247
246
250
256
267
261
260
262
263
265
266
175
175
176
174
174
174
176
175
175
176
174
176
175
174
174
161
162
T
Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Temperature
Model 8705/8707 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 169
Model 8711 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
W
Weight
Model 8705/8707 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
270
Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
00809-0400-4444, Rev AA
August 2015
Global Headquarters
Emerson Process Management
6021 Innovation Blvd
Shakopee, MN 55379, USA
+1 800 522 6277 or +1 303 527 5200
+1 303 530 8459
[email protected]
North America Regional Office
Emerson Process Management
7070 Winchester Circle
Boulder, CO 80301 USA
+1 800 522 6277 or +1 303 527 5200
+1 303 530 8459
[email protected]
Latin America Regional Office
Emerson Process Management
Multipark Office Center
Turrubares Building, 3rd & 4th floor
Guachipelin de Escazu, Costa Rica
+1 506 2505-6962
+1 954 846 5121
[email protected]
Europe Regional Office
Emerson Process Management Flow B.V.
Neonstraat 1
6718 WX Ede
The Netherlands
+31 (0) 318 495555
+31 (0) 318 495556
[email protected]
Asia Pacific Regional Office
Emerson Process Management Asia Pacific Pte Ltd
1 Pandan Crescent
Singapore 128461
+65 6777 8211
+65 6777 0947
[email protected]
Middle East and Africa Regional Office
Emerson Process Management
Emerson FZE P.O. Box 17033,
Jebel Ali Free Zone - South 2
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
+971 4 8118100
+971 4 8865465
[email protected]
">